Mn00281e PDF

WEB LCT
ALFOplus
Software application for the management

of ALFOplus equipment
Release 1.2
User manual
MN.00281.E - 004
The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.
Property of SIAE MICROELETTRONICA. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the inter-
national regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.
Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen dis-
played is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.
MS-DOS®, MS Windows® are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
HP®, HP OpenView NNM and HP–UX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks.
UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark.
Oracle® is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.
Mozilla Firefox is a Mozilla Foundation registered trademark.
Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system.
Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL).
Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.
WEB LCT ALFOplus
Contents
MANUAL CONTENT ................................................................................................................... 9
WEB LCT APPLICATION.......................................................................................................... 10

FUNCTIONALITIES .............................................................................................................. 11
LIMITS.............................................................................................................................. 12
INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................... 13
WEB LOCAL CRAFT TERMINAL (WEB LCT) PAGE..................................................................... 14

OPEN/CLOSE THE WEB LCT PAGE ......................................................................................... 15
Open the WEB LCT page from Browser (Ethernet connection) ............................................. 15
Open the WEB LCT page from SCT/LMT ........................................................................... 15
Open more WEB LCT pages............................................................................................ 16
Close the WEB LCT page................................................................................................ 16
ELEMENTS OF WEB LCT PAGE .............................................................................................. 17
Equipment Menu area ................................................................................................... 18
Equipment info area...................................................................................................... 19
Users area ................................................................................................................... 20
User Profile parameter............................................................................................. 20
[Logout] parameter ................................................................................................ 20
[Logged Users] parameter ....................................................................................... 21
Verify the users connected to the equipment ........................................................ 21
Force the logout of a user .................................................................................. 21
[Open Far End] parameter ....................................................................................... 22
Open the WEB LCT page of an equipment (Remote Link) ........................................ 22
[Help] parameter.................................................................................................... 22
Remote elements list area ............................................................................................. 23
Verify the remote equipment list ............................................................................... 23
Add a station to the list ........................................................................................... 24
Rename a station of the list ..................................................................................... 24
Remove a station of the list...................................................................................... 24
Add an equipment to the list .................................................................................... 25
Remove an equipment from the list........................................................................... 25
Reset the remote equipment list ............................................................................... 26
Open the WEB LCT page of an equipment of the list (Remote Link)................................ 26
Remote equipment list (more info) ............................................................................ 26
Contextual area............................................................................................................ 27
Equipment status area .................................................................................................. 28
Verify the active manual operations .......................................................................... 29
Verify/modify the manual operation timeout ............................................................... 29
WEB LCT ALFOplus - Release 1.2 - MN.00281.E - 004 1

Alarm and status signals (more info) ......................................................................... 29
MESSAGES DISPLAYED IN WEB LCT PAGE ............................................................................. 30
MENU AND COMMANDS (EQUIPMENT MENU) ......................................................................... 31

MAIN ................................................................................................................................ 32
Equipment Properties .................................................................................................... 33
Verify the equipment properties (type, ID, SNMP IP address, etc.) ................................ 33
Modify the equipment identifier ................................................................................ 33
Modify the IP address of the SNMP agent of the equipment .......................................... 33
Align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC .......... 34
Verify the equipment addresses ................................................................................ 34
Verify the functionalities enabled for the equipment .................................................... 34
Enable the new functionalities .................................................................................. 34
Verify the equipment units ....................................................................................... 35
Execute the equipment software reset ....................................................................... 35
Equipment Properties contextual area........................................................................ 36
General Info tab ............................................................................................... 36
Network tab ..................................................................................................... 36
Equipment Features tab ..................................................................................... 37
Equipment Units tab.......................................................................................... 37
Port Configuration ........................................................................................................ 39
Verify/modify the network address and the supervision parameters of the equipment ...... 39
Restore the access to equipment CPU ........................................................................ 40
Port Configuration contextual area ............................................................................ 41
Ethernet tab..................................................................................................... 41
Management configurations (more info)..................................................................... 42
Routing Table............................................................................................................... 43
Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway used by the equipment ...................... 43
Add an element to the Routing Table ......................................................................... 43
Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table ................................................ 43
Set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway .................................................... 44
Delete the IP Address used as Default Gateway .......................................................... 44
Routing Table contextual area .................................................................................. 45
Routing Table and Default Gateway (more info) .......................................................... 46
Stored Routing Table .................................................................................................... 47
Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway present into the backup memory of the con-
troller.................................................................................................................... 47
Add an element into the Stored Routing Table ............................................................ 47
Remove one or more elements from the Stored Routing Table ...................................... 48
Set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table .......... 48
Delete the IP address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table ................. 48
Stored Routing Table contextual area ........................................................................ 49
Performance Monitoring................................................................................................. 50
Verify the status of the PM measures......................................................................... 50
Activate a PM measure ............................................................................................ 51
Activate all PM measures in a group contemporaneously .............................................. 51
Deactivate a PM measure......................................................................................... 51
Deactivate all PM measure in a group contemporaneously ............................................ 51
G828 Radio <radio branch> measure ........................................................................ 52
Display the results and the threshold exceeding alarms (G828 Radio) ...................... 52
Reset the values of the records (daily and primary) (G828 Radio)............................ 53
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms (G828 Radio) .............................................. 53
Set the thresholds of the control parameters and of the alarms (G828 Radio) ........... 53
ACM Radio <radio branch> measure ......................................................................... 55
Display the results and the threshold exceeding alarms (ACM Radio) ....................... 55
2 WEB LCT ALFOplus - Release 1.2 - MN.00281.E - 004

Reset the values of the records (daily and primary) (ACM Radio) ............................. 56
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms (ACM Radio) ............................................... 57
Set the thresholds of the alarms (ACM Radio) ....................................................... 57
Modify the modality used to increase the counters (ACM Radio) .............................. 60
RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure....................................................................... 61
Display the results and the threshold exceeding alarms (RxPwr Radio) ..................... 61
Reset the values of the records (daily and primary) (RxPwr Radio) .......................... 62
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms (RxPwr Radio) ............................................. 62
Set the thresholds of the control parameters and of the alarms (RxPwr Radio) .......... 63
TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure ....................................................................... 64
Display the results and the threshold exceeding alarms (TxPwr Radio) ..................... 64
Reset the values of the records (daily and primary) (TxPwr Radio) .......................... 65
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms (TxPwr Radio) ............................................. 65
Set the thresholds of the control parameters and of the alarms (TxPwr Radio) .......... 66
Performance Monitoring contextual area .................................................................... 67
Measures available for ALFOplus equipment ............................................................... 68
Quality parameters description (PM measures) ........................................................... 69
PM measures (more info)......................................................................................... 71
Report & Loggers Maint. ................................................................................................ 72
Save the configuration, the alarms and the operations executed by the users to file ........ 72
Delete the alarms stored into the equipment controller ................................................ 73
Delete the operations list stored into the equipment controller ...................................... 73
Report & Loggers Maint contextual area ..................................................................... 74
SNTP & Wake Up Config. ............................................................................................... 75
Verify the status of SNTP functionality ....................................................................... 75
Set the execution parameters and activate the SNTP functionality ................................. 75
Disable the SNTP functionality .................................................................................. 76
Verify the Wake Up functionality status...................................................................... 76
Set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality ............................ 76
Disable the Wake Up functionality ............................................................................. 76
SNTP & Wake Up Config. contextual area ................................................................... 77
SNTP tab ......................................................................................................... 77
Wake Up tab .................................................................................................... 77
SNTP functionality (more info) .................................................................................. 79
Wake Up functionality (more info) ............................................................................. 79
Software Info & Maint. .................................................................................................. 80
Verify the firmware version of the equipment ............................................................. 80
Update the firmware of the equipment....................................................................... 80
Switch the operation of the memory benches relevant to the main controller .................. 81
Verify the WEB LCT version present into the equipment ............................................... 81
Update the WEB LCT application ............................................................................... 82
Verify the communication stack in use ....................................................................... 82
Restore Factory Default of the equipment .................................................................. 82
Software Info & Maint contextual area ....................................................................... 84
Equipment Firmware tab .................................................................................... 84
WEB LCT tab .................................................................................................... 85
IP/OSI stack switch tab ..................................................................................... 85
Equipment firmware (more info) ............................................................................... 86
Factory Default of the equipment (more info) ............................................................. 86
Rescue connection (more info) ................................................................................. 86
Backup/Restore Config. ................................................................................................. 87
Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration) ................................... 87
Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration)................ 87
Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last op-
eration of configuration restore (revert configuration) .................................................. 88
Backup/Restore Config. contextual area..................................................................... 89

Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (more info) .......................................... 90
Alarm Severity Config. .................................................................................................. 91
Verify the severity level and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms ...................... 91
Enable/disable an alarm .......................................................................................... 91
Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm .................................................. 91
Change the severity level of an alarm ........................................................................ 92
Alarm Severity Config. contextual area ...................................................................... 93
Enabling/forwarding/severity of an alarm (more info) .................................................. 94
User Manager .............................................................................................................. 95
Verify the user list .................................................................................................. 95
Add a user to the list............................................................................................... 95
Modify a user into the list......................................................................................... 96
Delete a user from the list ....................................................................................... 96
Change the password and the timeout of the System user............................................ 96
Change the network password and timeout ................................................................ 97
Change the password and the timeout of NMS5UX user ............................................... 97
Verify/modify the IP address of Permanent Login ........................................................ 98
User Manager contextual area .................................................................................. 99
User list (more info) ...............................................................................................100
EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................................................101
BW & Mod./Link ID ......................................................................................................102
Verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters
of the adaptive modulation .....................................................................................102
Modify the reference band/modulation ......................................................................102
Modify the operating status of adaptive modulation ....................................................102
Modify the power profile of the RF transmitter (ACM enabled) ......................................103
Modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled) .....103
Verify/modify the link identification number ..............................................................103
BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area ..........................................................................104
Modulation & Capacity tab.................................................................................104
Local Link ID tab..............................................................................................105
Adaptive modulation (more info)..............................................................................106
Ethernet transport ...........................................................................................106
Multiple ACM profiles per modulation ..................................................................106
Reference modulation and power profile of the transmitter ....................................106
General Preset ............................................................................................................107
Verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception ..........................................107
Verify/modify the radio branch label .........................................................................107
Verify/modify the generation of the antenna aiming signal ..........................................107
General Preset contextual area ................................................................................108
SYNCHRONISATION...........................................................................................................109
Verify/modify the management of synchronisation ...........................................................109
Verify the status and configuration of the T0 synchronism .................................................109
Force the status of T0 synchronisation............................................................................110
Set the Hold Off Time parameter ...................................................................................110
Set the WTR Time parameter ........................................................................................110
Set the threshold levels of LTI alarm ..............................................................................110
Enable/disable the use of the source quality as criterion for the synchronism selection ..........111
Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source...............................................................111
Modify the use priority of a synchronism source ...............................................................111
Force the use of a synchronism source ...........................................................................112
Set a synchronism source as preferential ........................................................................112
Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source................................112
Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without waiting for the
expiry of Wait Time......................................................................................................113
Verify/modify the modality to assign the role of the LAN ports (1000Base-T) used as synchronism

sources ......................................................................................................................113
Verify/modify the management of SSM protocol for every single LAN..................................114
Synchronisation contextual area ....................................................................................115
General tab...........................................................................................................115
T0 tab ..................................................................................................................116
1000Base-T Role tab ..............................................................................................118
LAN SSM Enabling tab ............................................................................................118
Management of synchronisation (more info) ....................................................................119
Synchronism sources .............................................................................................119
Enabling of the synchronism sources ..................................................................119
Priority of the synchronism source......................................................................119
Quality of synchronism source ...........................................................................120
Forcing of a synchronism source ........................................................................121
Function of preferential synchronism source ........................................................121
Internal synchronism T0 .........................................................................................121
BASE BAND ......................................................................................................................122
Ethernet Switch (Enh.) .................................................................................................123
Common Parameters..............................................................................................124
Verify/modify the Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field ......................................124
Verify/modify the maximum size of the accepted packet .......................................124
Verify/modify the address learning modality in MAC Table .....................................125
Verify/modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table ...................125
Reset the MAC Table ........................................................................................125
Verify/modify the hysteresis of the Link Loss Forwarding modality ..........................125
Verify the existing virtual LAN’s .........................................................................126
Create a virtual Lan..........................................................................................126
Modify the configuration of a virtual Lan..............................................................127
Delete a virtual Lan ..........................................................................................127
Verify/modify the status of fragmentation of Ethernet packets ...............................127
Common Parameters contextual area .................................................................129
General tab ...............................................................................................129
Virtual Lan Config. tab ................................................................................129
LLF tab .....................................................................................................130
Radio Packet Fragm. tab .............................................................................130
Ethernet Enhanced Switch (more info) ................................................................131
Limitations in the configuration of the Ethernet Switch ....................................131
Replacement of C-TAG in a packet with original C-TAG ....................................134
Addition of S-TAG (QinQ – Double Tag) in a packet with C-TAG ........................135
Analysing the priority .................................................................................135
MAC Table.................................................................................................135
Priority Radio To Lan ..............................................................................................137
Verify/modify the output queue of LAN ports which a packet is assigned to depending on
its 802.1p priority Tag ......................................................................................137
Verify/modify the output queue of LAN ports which a packet is assigned to depending on
its PTOS/DSCP field..........................................................................................137
Priority Radio To Lan contextual area..................................................................139
Native 802.1p tab ......................................................................................139
PTOS/DSCP Config. tab...............................................................................139
Priority Lan To Radio ..............................................................................................141
Verify/modify the output queue of Radio port which a packets is assigned to depending
on its native 802.1p priority Tag ........................................................................141
Verify/modify the output queue of Radio port which a packet is assigned to depending on
its native MPLS priority Tag ...............................................................................141
Verify/modify the correspondence between MPLS priority and 802.1p priority of the pack-
ets in input from LAN ports and in output from Radio port .....................................142
Verify/modify the output queue of Radio port which a packets is assigned to depending
on its PTOS/DSCP field .....................................................................................142
Priority Lan To Radio contextual area..................................................................144

Native 802.1p/MPLS tab..............................................................................144
MPLS to 802.1p Rewrite tab ........................................................................145
PTOS/DSCP Config. tab...............................................................................145
Compression .........................................................................................................147
Verify/modify the compression of the headers of Ethernet packets in input from LAN
ports ..............................................................................................................147
Compression contextual area.............................................................................148
LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.) ...........................................................................................150
Verify/modify the enabling status of the LAN .............................................................151
Verify/modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the LAN .............................151
Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inac-
tive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN......................151
Verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the LAN ...................................152
Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in MAC Table for the LAN ............152
Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the LAN ....................................................153
Verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) for the LAN .............153
Verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line syn-
chronism for the LAN..............................................................................................153
Verify/modify the modality and the criteria used to limit the traffic in input from the LAN 153
Verify the current management modality of protocol 802.1Q .......................................156
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LAN to the
output queue of the Radio port ................................................................................156
Verify/modify the value for Port Default and 802.1p priority ........................................157
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the LAN ...............................157
Verify/modify the Service Tag List table ....................................................................157
Verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue of the
LANs ....................................................................................................................158
Verify/modify the default VID value of the LAN ..........................................................159
Verify/modify the management of the 802.1Q field on the messages in input from the
LAN .....................................................................................................................159
Verify/modify the traffic transport modality (point-point or Bridge) ...............................160
Verify/modify the management of Provider Tag in the packets in input from the LAN ......160
Verify/overwrite the C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN and forwarded to the
Radio with a different VID .......................................................................................160
Verify the list of VID’s registered in VLAN Table Unit and associated to the LAN..............161
Verify/modify the management of the LAN in Provider mode........................................162
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the LAN can transit ...162
Verify/modify the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality of the LAN .........162
Activate/deactivate the loop on line side of the LAN....................................................163
Verify the status and the configuration of the laser (LAN) ............................................163
Modify the enabling status of the laser (LAN).............................................................163
Modify the transmission mode of the laser (LAN)........................................................164
Enable manually the laser transmission (LAN)............................................................164
Execute the test laser operating status (LAN) ............................................................165
LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.) contextual area...............................................................166
Interface tab ...................................................................................................166
Input Filter Policing tab.....................................................................................168
Priority Management tab ...................................................................................169
802.1Q Management tab...................................................................................171
Queue Man. Radio to Lan tab.............................................................................173
Port Based VLAN tab ........................................................................................173
LLF tab ...........................................................................................................173
Line Loop tab ..................................................................................................174
Laser Control tab .............................................................................................174
Port A (Enh.) ..............................................................................................................176
Verify/modify the enabling status of the internal port .................................................176
Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the internal
port .....................................................................................................................177

Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the internal port
to the output queue of the LAN ports........................................................................177
Verify/modify the value for Port Default ....................................................................177
Verify/modify the mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the internal
port .....................................................................................................................178
Verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the internal port .......................178
Verify/modify the enabling status of the S_Gentle functionality of the internal port .........178
Verify/modify the integration constant on the drop possibility in a RED context (internal
port) ....................................................................................................................179
Verify/modify the configuration of the output queues of the internal port.......................179
Verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the internal port .181
Verify/modify the default VID value of the internal port...............................................182
Verify/overwrite the C-VID value of the packets in input from the internal port and forwarded
to a LAN port, with a different C-VID ........................................................................182
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the internal port .......183
Port A (Enh.) contextual area ..................................................................................184
Interface tab ...................................................................................................184
Priority Selection tab ........................................................................................184
Queue Management Lan To Radio tab .................................................................185
802.1Q Management tab...................................................................................187
Port Based VLan tab .........................................................................................187
RADIO BRANCH.................................................................................................................188
Verify/modify the duplex frequency................................................................................188
Verify/modify the frequency which the equipment transmitter is tuned on ...........................188
Verify/modify the frequency in reception.........................................................................189
Verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier .......................................................189
Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter .................................................................189
Verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx) ...................................................190
Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx)...............................................190
Verify/modify ATPC operating status ..............................................................................190
Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter ....................................191
Verify/modify the ATPC regulation range.........................................................................191
Set the transmission power to the minimum value ...........................................................191
Verify/modify the thresholds of ATPC device....................................................................191
Display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/reception for every
ACM profile .................................................................................................................192
Radio Branch contextual area ........................................................................................193
Settings tab ....................................................................................................193
Powers tab......................................................................................................194
MAINTENANCE ..................................................................................................................195
Lan Statistics ..............................................................................................................196
Verify the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output from the Ethernet ports subdivided
by each port .........................................................................................................196
Reset the counters’ results ......................................................................................196
Lan Statistics contextual area ..................................................................................197
Lan Stat. Summary......................................................................................................199
Verify the summary of the main counters of the Ethernet ports ....................................199
Reset the counters’ results ......................................................................................199
Lan Stat. Summary contextual area .........................................................................200
Advanced Stat. Mon. ....................................................................................................201
Verify/manage the main counters of an Ethernet port whose traffic is filtered according to In-
ternal Priority value ...............................................................................................201
Verify/manage the main counters of an Ethernet port whose traffic is filtered according to C-
VID identifier ........................................................................................................203
Verify/manage the main counters of an Ethernet port whose traffic is filtered according to the
S-VID and C-VID identifiers.....................................................................................204
Advanced Stat. Mon. contextual area........................................................................207

RMon .........................................................................................................................208
Verify the collection status of the statistic counters of the equipment Ethernet ports .......208
Activate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port ..............................208
Deactivate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port...........................208
Display the values of statistical counters of an Ethernet port........................................209
RMon contextual area.............................................................................................210
Remote Monitoring window ...............................................................................210
Implementation of the RMon standard in the equipment managed by WEB LCT ..............212
RMon Standard................................................................................................212
Outline on the operation of RMon standard ..........................................................212
Management from Web LCT of the statistics counters foreseen by RMON standard ....212
Ethernet counters (RMon) .................................................................................212
S/N Meas ...................................................................................................................214
Verify the value of the S/N measure .........................................................................214
Update the value of the S/N measure .......................................................................214
S/N Meas. contextual area ......................................................................................215
Radio BER ..................................................................................................................216
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of Radio BER measure .....................216
Activate the measure (BER and error count) ..............................................................216
Deactivate the measure (BER and error count) ..........................................................216
Radio BER contextual area ......................................................................................217
Radio Loop .................................................................................................................218
Verify the radio loops status ....................................................................................218
Activate a radio loop ..............................................................................................218
Deactivate a radio loop...........................................................................................218
Radio Loop contextual area .....................................................................................219
Loop (more info) ...................................................................................................220
ALARMS LIST ....................................................................................................................... 221
OPERATIONS LIST ............................................................................................................... 225
PARAMETERS LIST ............................................................................................................... 231
ASSISTANCE SERVICE.......................................................................................................... 235

MANUAL CONTENT
This manual describes the commands and functionalities of WEB Local Craft Terminal application (re-
lease 1.2) present in ALFOplus equipment.
The WEB LCT release present in the equipment can be verified opening the relevant WEB Local Craft Ter-
minal page and selecting, in Equipment Menu area, one of the following commands:
• Main > Equipment Properties - General Info tab - WEB LCT Version parameter.
• Main > Software Info & Maint. - Web LCT tab - Current Version parameter.
In this manual, to make the writing easier, the wording:

• WEB LCT identifies the WEB Local Craft Terminal application for ALFOplus.
• WEB LCT page identifies the WEB Local Craft Terminal page for ALFOplus.

WEB LCT APPLICATION
WEB LCT application allows an user connecting to an equipment via his own machine (PC, Workstation,
etc.) using the operating system and the Web browser at his disposal.
WEB LCT is an application resident in the equipment controller. It does not require any additional module
installed on the user PC (see Installation).
At start-up of WEB LCT application, the browser displays the WEB Local Craft Terminal (WEB LCT) page.
The WEB LCT page can be opened directly from browser or from SCT/LMT program (see Open/close the
WEB LCT page).
In the first case, the WEB LCT interface of the equipment, whose IP is entered in the address bar of the
browser, is opened (see Fig.1).
In the second case, the WEB LCT interface of the equipment selected in SCT/LMT application is opened
(see Fig.2).
Through WEB LCT application, the user can check the equipment operating status and directly intervene
to manage it, verifying/modifying the configuration parameters (see Functionalities and Menu and com-
mands (Equipment Menu).
Fig.1 WEB LCT application (start-up of WEB LCT page from browser)
Equipment User PC
(e.g. 172.18.60.33) Browser
NE
Controller Supervision management
WEB LCT page
port equipment
WEB LCT Internet (172.18.60.33)
application (HTTP)
FTP SCT/LMT
Help Web Server or
Web Lct Console
Fig.2 WEB LCT application (start-up of WEB LCT page from SCT/LMT)
User PC
Equipment
(e.g. 172.18.60.33) SCT/LMT
Supervision NE management
Controller
FTP Equipment
port
Help Web Server (172.18.60.33)
WEB LCT Internet
application (HTTP)
WEB LCT
page
equipment
(172.18.60.33)

FUNCTIONALITIES
Through the WEB LCT application, it is possible to manage:

• The properties (identifier, addresses, reference date/time, hardware, features key, etc.) and to
execute the reset of the equipment software (Equipment Properties).
• The network address and the supervision parameters of the equipment (Port Configuration).
• The stating Routing Table and the Default Gateway address currently used by the equipment
(Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway) (Routing Table).
• The static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address stored in the equipment (Stored Rout-
ing Table and Stored Default Gateway) (Stored Routing Table).
• The measures of Performance Monitoring (Performance Monitoring).
• The saving to file of the equipment configuration, of the status/alarm signals and of the opera-
tions executed by the users (Report & Loggers Maint.).
• The automatic acquisition of the reference date/time of the equipment from a network element
and the Wake Up trap (SNTP & Wake Up Config.).
• The equipment firmware, the WEB LCT software present in the equipment, the communication
stack used by the equipment and the restore of the default equipment settings (Software Info
& Maint.).
• The backup/restore of the whole equipment configuration (Backup/Restore Config.).
• The forward status of the alarms and their severity level (Alarm Severity Config.).
• The equipment users list (User Manager).
• The equipment general configuration (modulation/capacity, adaptive modulation etc.) (Equip-
ment).
• The sources and the synchronism parameters (Synchronisation).
• The Ethernet Switch (Base Band).
• The radio parameters (Radio Branch).
• The LAN statistics, RMon, S/N, Radio BER and radio loops (Maintenance).
• The Remote elements list area
• The manual operations and the relevant timeout (Equipment status area).
• The users connected to the equipment ([Logged Users] parameter).

LIMITS
Maximum number of... Limit
Equipment in remote equipment list 100
Stations in remote equipment list 30
Equipment which can be connected contemporarily via a single WEB 1

LCT page
Users (WEB LCT, SCT/LMT and NMS5UX) contemporarily connected to 2

an equipment via the WEB LCT page
Signals in the Events area 400

INSTALLATION
WEB LCT is an application resident in the equipment controller. It does not require any installation on the
user PC.
To install or update the WEB LCT application present in an equipment, see Update the WEB LCT application.
The program SCT/LMT or WEB Lct Console (1) must be used as help for the WEB LCT application, in order
to manage the transfer of files between PC and equipment (FTP) and of the help-on-line of WEB LCT (Help
Web Server).
The instructions for the installation of the SCT/LMT and Web Lct Console programs are reported in the rel-
evant manuals.
(1)
The programs SCT/LMT and WEB LCT Console work in MS Windows® environment. For operating sys-
tems different from MS Windows®, the user must install a FTP server and a Help WEB server on one’s PC.

WEB LOCAL CRAFT TERMINAL (WEB LCT) PAGE
Open/close the WEB LCT page

Elements of WEB LCT page
Messages displayed in WEB LCT page

OPEN/CLOSE THE WEB LCT PAGE
Open the WEB LCT page from Browser (Ethernet connection)

Open the WEB LCT page from SCT/LMT
Open more WEB LCT pages
Close the WEB LCT page
Open the WEB LCT page from Browser (Ethernet connection)
WARNING If Ethernet connection is used, checks or settings are not generally necessary. Only if more net-
work cards are equipped, it will be necessary to select the card you wish to use (Host Adapter) (see Web
Lct Console user manual).
When the equipment is connected to the PC via LAN network, the relevant WEB LCT page can be opened
also selecting the equipment from the address book of Web Lct Console (see relevant documentation).
The following procedure requires that:
• The relevant WEB LCT application is present on the equipment which you are connecting to.
• The user, you wish to use to open the WEB LCT page, is valid. With valid user (username and
password) we mean an user present in the users list stored in the controller (see User list (more
info).
1. Run WEB Lct Console program (see relevant documentation).

The WLC program must be used as help for the WEB LCT application, in order to manage the FTP, PPP
and Help Web Server
2. Run a browser.
3. Type in the address box:

http://<IP address of the equipment>
With IP address we mean the address of the equipment supervision port from which you wish to reach
the equipment itself.
The WEB LCT login page opens.
4. Type the name of the SCT/LMT user, in the Username box.
5. Type the access, in the Password box,
6. Check the Remember Me box if you wish that, on the next opening of the application, the current user
name and password are automatically displayed; otherwise uncheck the considered box.
7. Press Login.
If the typed values are correct, the system displays the WEB LCT page of the equipment (see Fig.3).
As regards the messages that can be displayed during the start procedure of WEB LCT see Messages
displayed in WEB LCT page.
Open the WEB LCT page from SCT/LMT
WARNING The following procedure requires that:

• The relevant WEB LCT application is present on the equipment you are connecting to.
• The user, you wish to use to open the WEB LCT page, is valid. With valid user (username and
password) we mean an user present in the users list stored in the controller (see User list (more
info).
• The SCT/LMT is installed on the PC. More information about the SCT/LMT program is reported
in the relevant documentation.

1. Run SCT/LMT program (see relevant documentation).
2. Activate the connection with the wished equipment (see relevant documentation).
3. Execute one of the following operations:

• Double click on the record representing the equipment in the SCT/LMT window.
• Select the record of the equipment and then the Equipment > LCT Interface command.
The system displays the WEB LCT page of the equipment (see Fig.3).
As regards the messages that can be displayed during the start procedure of WEB LCT see Messages
displayed in WEB LCT page.
At the opening of the WEB LCT page, the user will be connected to the equipment with the user/profile
of the equipment in the SCT/LMT window.
In any moment, it is possible to execute the logout and re-execute the login using the same or a dif-
ferent user with respect to that used for the login.
In this case, there is no need to differentiate the opening of the WEB LCT page according to the connection
type, as the connection management is executed by the SCT/LMT program itself. For more information,
refer to the relevant documentation.
Open more WEB LCT pages
It is possible to open:
• More WEB LCT pages on more machines or on the same machine, using the same user or dif-
ferent users.
• Only one WEB LCT page relevant to the same equipment.
• More WEB LCT pages relevant to different equipment.
For more information about the limits of the application, refer to the Limits paragraph.
Close the WEB LCT page
Select the [Logout] parameter.

ELEMENTS OF WEB LCT PAGE
1 - Equipment Menu area

2 - Equipment info area
3 - Users area
4 - Remote elements list area
5 - Contextual area
6 - Equipment status area
Fig.3 shows an example of WEB LCT page of ALFOplus equipment.
Fig.3 Elements of the WEB LCT page (ALFOplus)
3
1 2
5 4

Equipment Menu area
The Equipment Menu area contains the commands to manage the equipment configuration (see Fig.3).
The commands are subdivided in groups:

Main. Commands to manage the general equipment parameters: supervision ports, Routing Table,
Performance Monitoring measures, etc.
Equipment, Synchronisation, etc. Commands to manage the configuration parameters typical of
the equipment type which the WEB LCT page refers to.
The description of every group/command is reported in paragraph Menu and commands (Equipment
Menu).
The selection of a group expands or compresses the list of the underlaying commands.
At each selection, the list takes the status complementary to the previous one (if compressed it becomes
expanded, or vice versa).
The symbol:
• identifies an expanded group.
• identifies a compressed group.
It is possible:
• Expand all the groups at the same time, pressing
• Compress all the groups at the same time, pressing .
The symbol identifies a command which, once selected, displays the parameters associated to it in the
context area (see Contextual area).
When the WEB page is opened, the Equipment Menu area is displayed.
In any moment, it can be hidden pressing present in the area itself (see Fig.3).
To display the area again, press the relevant button .

Equipment info area
The Equipment info area indicates the equipment general properties:
Equipment Type. Equipment type.
Equipment ID. Equipment identifier.
Agent IP Address. IP Address assigned to the SNMP agent of the equipment.
The left table (see Fig.3) shows the status and radio parameters of the transmitter and receiver.
Every row of the table corresponds to a radio branch for which is displayed:
Branch which the data, present in the relevant row, refer to:
• Tx1A. Operating status and radio parameters of the branch relevant to transmission.
• Rx1A. Operating status and radio parameters of the branch relevant to reception.
RF frequency. The wording ODU Hardware Failure indicates a hardware problem.

Power in input to the receiver (line Rx1A) and in output to the transmitter (line Tx1A). Both the
powers are measured at the antenna flange.
The wording Tx Off (line Tx1A) indicates that the transmitter is off because of an action of the user
(see Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter - selection of Off or Permanent Off option) or
because of the activation of one or more alarms which cause the switch-off of the transmitter (for
example, RADIO Vco Fail Alarm).
The right table (see Fig.3) shows the current ACM profile and the Ethernet radio traffic (Tx/Rx):
ACM Profile. Current ACM profile.
ETH Capacity. Radio capacity reserved to Ethernet tributaries.
The information in the Equipment Info area can be updated pressing .
When the WEB page is opened, the Equipment Info area is displayed.
In any moment, it can be hidden pressing present in the area itself (see Fig.3).
To display the area again, press the relevant push-button .

Users area
In the Users area is present:

User Profile parameter
[Logout] parameter
[Logged Users] parameter
[Open Far End] parameter
[Help] parameter
User Profile parameter
The User Profile parameter shows the login and profile of the user who has opened the WEB LCT page:
System. The equipment is in connected/login status and the user has System profile.
The System user can both verify the parameters and send commands or change the equipment con-
figuration with no exception.
Station Op. The equipment is in connected/login status and the user has Station Operator profile.
The Station Operator user can as check the parameters as send commands or execute changes to
the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying the user list, aligning
the date/time of the equipment, force the logout of an user and all those operations available only
to the System user (or NMS5UX).
Read & Write. The equipment is in connected/login status and the user has Read & Write profile.
The Read & Write user can check the parameters and execute only maintenance operations (MAN
OP).
Monitor. The equipment is in connected/monitor status or in connected/login status and the user
has Read Only profile.
The Read Only user can check the parameters but it can not forward commands or execute changing
to the equipment configuration.
At the opening of the WEB LCT page, the user will be connected to the equipment with the user/profile
entered during the login request.
In any moment it is possible to execute the logout and re-execute the login using the same or a different
user with respect to that used for the login.
If the equipment is managed also by the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system, the supervi-
sory system considers the connection of a SCT/LMT user with Read Only profile a WEB LCT connection in
Monitoring mode.
While the supervisory system considers the connection to the equipment of a SCT/LMT user with Read &
Write, Station Operator or System profile a WEB LCT connection in Configuration mode.
[Logout] parameter
The [Logout] parameter executes the logout of the current user.

When selected, the WEB LCT page to login to the equipment is displayed.
To reconnect equipment, set Username and Password and press Login.

[Logged Users] parameter
The [Logged Users] parameter manages the users connected to the equipment.
In detail, the parameter allows:
Verify the users connected to the equipment
Force the logout of a user
Verify the users connected to the equipment
User Profile | Monitor, Read Only, Read & Write, Station Operator, System
1. Select the [Logged Users] parameter.

The Current Logged User window displays the list of the users connected to the equipment when the
command is selected.
For each users, is pointed out in the column:
• User. User name.
The wording NMS5UX shows the user of the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system
or a remote user (different from WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX user) who has the possibility to
be connected to the equipment (Permanent Login).
The other wordings identify the WEB LCT or SCT/LMT users connected to the equipment.
• Profile. User profile.
• Timeout. Timeout of the WEB LCT session:
• No Timeout. Session timeout disabled. WEB LCT session opened by the user (even if dis-
connected) will be kept for an indefinite period of time.
• <number> Seconds. Session timeout enabled. WEB LCT session opened by the user, if
disconnected, will be automatically ended once reached the set time limit.
With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session whose relevant WEB LCT has been
closed but for which the disconnection from the equipment has not been executed (user logout).
• User IP Address. Machine IP address.
With the wording machine, it is intended the PC (for the WEB LCT and SCT/LMT users) or the
server/ workstation (for the NMS5UX users and remote users) on which the application used by
the user is actually running.
Press Refresh to update the data present in the window.
Force the logout of a user
User Profile | System
WARNING Logging out oneself is not possible.

If the logout of a NMS5UX user is forced, the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system automati-
cally executes the restore of the user login.
1. Select the [Logged Users] parameter.
2. Select the wished user.
3. Press Force Logout and confirm.

Into the Current Logged User window, the system removes the line relevant to the selected user.
If the Force Logout push-button is not available, this means that the record relevant to one’s user has
been selected.

[Open Far End] parameter
The [Open Far End] parameter allows to Open the WEB LCT page of an equipment (Remote Link) contained
in the Remote Element Table.
Open the WEB LCT page of an equipment (Remote Link)
1. Select the [Open Far End] parameter.

If the remote equipment list contains:
• Only one equipment of type Remote Link, the WEB LCT login page of the remote equipment is
displayed.
Type the name (Username box) and the access code (Password box) of the SCT/LMT user to use
to activate the connection and press Login. In a new page the WEB LCT of the remote equip-
ment is displayed.
If the WEB LCT login page is not displayed when the login is required, this means that the remote
equipment is unreachable.
• No equipment of type Remote Link, a message is displayed pointing out the absence of the re-
mote equipment.
• More equipment of type Remote Link, the Available Remote Elements window is displayed, con-
taining the list of equipment configured as Remote Link present in the remote equipment list.
For each equipment, the following characteristics are reported:
• Station. Station name.
• Equipment ID. Equipment identifier.
• IP Address. IP address.
Select the remote equipment and press Open or double click on the equipment.
The WEB LCT page to login to the remote equipment opens.
Type the name (Username box) and the access code (Password box) of the SCT/LMT user to use
to activate the connection and press Login. In a new page the WEB LCT of the remote equip-
ment is displayed.
[Help] parameter
The [Help] parameter opens the help online of application.

Remote elements list area
In the Remote elements list area, you can manage the remote equipment list stored in the equipment con-
troller.
In detail, it possible:
Verify the remote equipment list
Add a station to the list
Rename a station of the list
Remove a station of the list
Add an equipment to the list
Remove an equipment from the list
Reset the remote equipment list
Open the WEB LCT page of an equipment of the list (Remote Link)
The area Remote elements list can be hidden pressing the button present in the area itself (see Fig.3).
To display the area again, press the relevant push-button .
When the WEB page is opened, the Remote elements list area is hidden.
In order to deepen this topic, see Remote equipment list (more info)
Verify the remote equipment list
1. In WEB LCT page, expand the area Remote elements list selecting the push-button present in the
area itself (see Fig.3).
The area indicates the remote equipment list stored in the equipment controller.
Equipment is subdivided into stations.
The symbol identifies the station.
Selecting the symbol of a station expands or compress the list of underlaying equipment. At each se-
lection, the list takes the status complementary to the previous one (if compressed it becomes expand-
ed and vice versa).
For each station, the name of the station is displayed in the Station/Equip. column.
The name of the station is assigned by the user during the creation of the station itself.
The stations are displayed in the same order as they are inserted in the list
An empty station, that is a station without associated equipment, cannot be stored in the list.
The symbol or identifies the equipment.
The first symbol represents the equipment of type Managed by SCT, Elem. Manager, Not Managed; the
second symbol represents the equipment of type Remote Link (see column Type).
In the Station/Equip. column, the equipment name is displayed. The name of the equipment is auto-
matically assigned by the application during the creation of the equipment itself: Equipment <progres-
sive number>.
Within the station, the equipment are listed in increasing order with respect to the IP address.
For each equipment is pointed out in the column:
• IP Addr. IP address (Agent SNMP).
• Type. Type of equipment:
• Managed by SCT. Equipment managed by WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application.
• Remote Link. Equipment, managed by WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application, constituting
the equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to the local
equipment (equipment which the user is connected to by WEB LCT).
• Elem. Manager. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where
the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system resides).

• Not Managed. Element not managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application.
This option can be used to insert into the remote equipment list for instance the coupling
between the IP address and the NSAP (Gosip) one of an equipment inserted into an OSI
network.
• OSI. Equipment NSAP (GOSIP) Address.
Parameter available only for the equipment managed with the OSI protocol.
Press Refresh to refresh the list.
Add a station to the list
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING A maximum of 30 stations can be inserted in a list.
1. In the Remote elements list area, press Add (Station group).

2. Type, in the text box, the name to be assigned to the station (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and
maximum 11 characters).
The program does not create two stations with the same name in the same list. Moreover, a digit cannot
be used as first character and the space character cannot be used at the beginning or within the name
string.
3. Press OK.
The application displays the new station into the Remote elements list area, at the end of the list rele-
vant to the already existing stations.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

An empty station, that is a station without associated equipment, is not saved in the list.
Rename a station of the list
1. In the Remote elements list area, select the station to be renamed.
2. Press Rename.
3. Type, into the text box, the new name (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 11 char-
acters).
The program does not create two stations with the same name in the same list. Moreover, a digit cannot
be used as first character and the space character cannot be used at the beginning or within the name
string.
4. Press OK.
The application displays the new name of the station into the Remote elements list area.
Remove a station of the list
WARNING Deleting the station causes even the removal of all the equipment associated to this station.
1. In the Remote elements list area, select the station to be removed.
2. Press Remove (Station group).

The application removes the station from the Remote elements list area.

Add an equipment to the list
WARNING A maximum of 100 equipment can be added to the list.

An equipment cannot be created if at least one station has not been created before.
1. In the Remote elements list area, select the station to which the equipment has to be coupled.
If the user does not select any station, the application will automatically associated the equipment to
the last selected station.
2. Press Add (Element group).
3. Type the IP address of the equipment in IP Address box.

The program does not create two equipment with the same IP Address in the same list (even if in dif-
ferent stations).
4. Only if the equipment is inserted into an OSI network, set the NSAP address (Gosip Address box) open-
ing the popup menu and setting in the box:
• AFI, IDI, Ver, Auth, Reserv. e Sel, the value of the corresponding byte/s.
• Domain, the values of the bytes that represent the Domain.
• Area, the values of the bytes that represent the area.
• Sys. ID, the value of the wished System ID.
5. Press OK.
6. Set the Type of element box, selecting the option relevant to the element type to be inserted:
• Managed by SCT. Equipment managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application.
• Remote Link. Equipment managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application that constitutes
the equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to the local equip-
ment (equipment which the user is connected to by WEB LCT).
• Element Manager. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where the
NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system resides).
• Not Managed. Element not managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application.
This option can be used to insert in the remote equipment list for instance, the association be-
tween the IP address and the NSAP (Gosip) address of an equipment inserted in an OSI network.
7. Press OK.
In the Remote elements list area, under the selected station, a record named Equipment <progressive
number> is displayed with the characteristics of the new equipment.
Remove an equipment from the list
1. In the Remote elements list area, select the equipment to be removed.
2. Press Remove (Equipment group).

The application removes the station from the Remote elements list area.

Reset the remote equipment list
1. In the Remote elements list area, press Clear.

The application clears all the records (stations and equipment) present into the Remote elements list
area.
Open the WEB LCT page of an equipment of the list (Remote Link)
1. In the Remote elements list area, select the equipment of Remote Link type to be opened the WEB LCT
page.
2. Press Open.
The WEB LCT page to login to the remote equipment opens.
3. Type the name (Username box) and the access code (Password box) of the SCT/LMT user to use to
activate the connection and press Login.
In a new page the WEB LCT of the remote equipment is displayed.
Remote equipment list (more info)
Every equipment has a remote equipment list stored in its own controller.
With remote equipment list we mean a list containing all the network remote equipment which you wish
to connect to.
For a better vision of the equipment during the setting of the list, the equipment can be subdivided into
stations in such a way that, when a station is selected, the application will display only the detail of the
equipment associated with this specific station. The station does not have any particular meaning: it has
been simply introduced to help the user during the localization of the equipment.
In every remote equipment list, a maximum of 100 equipment and 30 stations can be created.
The remote equipment list can be used to connect, at the same time, to more equipment only if the pro-
gram SCT/LMT is available.
When the user requests the connection to a generic equipment present into the network (local equipment),
at the connection of this equipment, SCT/LMT program reads its remote equipment list and automatically
forwards the connection command to all the equipment present into the list.
In this way, the application displays, in the Station List area of SCT/LMT graphical interface, all the stations
that group the equipment and, in the Equipment List area (selecting the relevant station), it displays the
functional status of the local equipment (that results in connected/login status) and the functional status
of all the remote equipment present in the list. The equipment which have answered to the connection
request of the application will result in connected/monitor status.
The application will cyclically forward the connection command, to the equipment which have not answered
to the connection request, until to:
• The connection with the local equipment is deactivated.
• The user disables the equipment.
• The equipment is deleted from the remote equipment list of the local equipment.
More details about SCT/LMT program are reported into the relevant manuals.

Contextual area
The contextual area is the part of the WEB LCT page where the equipment parameters are displayed.
Its content changes accordingly to the selected command in the Equipment Menu area.
In the top part of the contextual area, there are push-buttons used to confirm or update the data present
in the area itself. Usually, there are:
Apply. Selecting it makes the changes, executed on the parameters present in the contextual area,
effective.
Its selection opens a confirmation window. The confirmation windows are timed. When this period
is elapsed (pointed out by the progress bar), if the user has not confirmed the operation, the window
is closed and the operation cancelled.
If the push-button is not available:
• It is not possible to execute changes because the user profile does not allow this or the
equipment is in connected/monitor status.
• No parameter present in the window has been modified. In this case, the push-button be-
comes available when the value of a parameter is changed.
• Another push-button is present in the contextual area for the confirmation of the operation
or the change of the parameters.
Refresh. Force the reading of the data from equipment.

If the push-button is not available, the connection with the equipment is not active.
Help. Open the help on-line.
For some commands, other push-buttons are displayed relevant only to the context which contains them.
These push-buttons are described in the paragraph relevant to the specific command.
Besides the push-buttons, the top part of the contextual area dynamically displays the group and the com-
mand selected in Equipment Menu area and which the displayed parameters refer to.
For some commands, the parameters are subdivided in tabs. The selection of a tab dynamically changes
the content of the contextual area.
The parameters present in the contextual area can be read-only or set or modified.
The description of the single commands (see Menu and commands (Equipment Menu) indicates the param-
eters which can be modified and modalities to do that.
Generally, for the parameter setting, the following rules are valid:
• Entering a value (alphanumeric string) in a text box.
If a red line is displayed below the text box, the entered value is not allowed because, for ex-
ample, a number of characters greater than the allowed one or an invalid value has been entered
(for example, entering of value 172.18.70.334 as IP address).
• Box with possible values displayed in a drop-down menu.
When the value is changed, a red triangle is displayed in the top left edge of the box. It signals
that the value has been changed, but the change has not been communicated yet to the equip-
ment (pressure of push-button Apply).

Equipment status area
The Equipment status area indicates the functional status of the equipment. Area/box:
Events. List of the status/alarm signals of the equipment.

Each signal corresponds to a record that is displayed:
• Coloured box. Signal type and alarm gravity:
• Green/Status. Status signal.
• Light blue/Warning. Alarm detected with Warning severity.
• Yellow/Minor. Alarm detected with Minor severity.
• Orange/Major. Alarm detected with Major severity.
• Red/Critical. Alarm detected with Critical severity.
• White/Cleared. Alarm detected/cleared.
• Alphanumeric string which details the nature of the signal.
• Logic group which the signal belongs to: COMMON, etc.
• Date/time of the signal detection.
If the row refers to a detected/cleared alarm, the date/time of alarm detection will be pointed
out under the date/time of alarm clearing.
The date/time is set by the network element that has generated the signal. The format of date/
time changes depending on the setting made in the operating system.
When the WEB page is opened, the Events area is displayed.

Press to hide the area (see Fig.3). Press to display the area again.
Press to dynamically update information and remove the detected and cleared alarms (box White/
Cleared).
URGENT <alarms number>. Number of Critical and/or Major alarms. Colour box:
• Orange. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Major severity
• Red. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Critical severity.
• Grey. The equipment has no active alarms with Critical or Major severity.
Select the box to display the detail of the active alarm.
NOT URG. <alarms number>. Number of Minor and/or Warning alarms. Colour box:
• Light blue. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Warning severity.
• Yellow. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Minor severity.
• Grey. The equipment has no active alarms with Minor or Warning severity.
Select the box to display the detail of the active alarm.
DOWNLOAD. Update of the equipment firmware. Colour box:

• Light blue. The firmware update is in progress.
• Grey. The firmware update is not in progress.
MAN. OP. Activation of the manual operations. Colour box:

• Light blue. A manual forcing is enabled (e.g. a loop).
• Grey. No manual forcing is active.
Select the box to:
Verify the active manual operations
Verify/modify the manual operation timeout
The information displayed in the Equipment status area are updated at regular intervals depending on the
timeout set by the user.
The progress of the bar ( ) indicates the time between two successive updates.
Select the bar to display the current timeout.
To change the parameter, move the cursor to the new value (number between 5 and 30 seconds).
In order to deepen this topic, see Alarm and status signals (more info)

Verify the active manual operations
1. Select the MAN. OP box.

A window displays the manual operations actually activated into the equipment.
The wording None active manual operation indicates that no manual operation is active.
The information are not dynamically updated. Press to update the information.
Verify/modify the manual operation timeout
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read Only, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING The timeout setting is common for all the manual forcing operations of the equipment.
1. Select the MAN. OP box.

The Manual Operation Timeout box displays the current timeout of the manual operations.
Value 0 indicates that the timeout has not been activated, this means that the activation of a manual
operation remains active until when the user deactivates it. The activation of a manual forcing (for in-
stance a loop) affects the traffic.
2. To change the parameter, set a value between 0 and 172800 sec. (48 hours).
The setting of the value 0 corresponds to the disabling of the timeout.
3. Press Change and confirm.
Alarm and status signals (more info)
The term alarm defines the fault signal generated by an error or malfunction of the equipment or of any
component that composes it.
The term status identifies instead the signals referring to any event that does not indicates a malfunction
but a status change, an operation in progress or an operating indication.
The term event defines each single signal of status, detected alarm and cleared alarm.
A maximum of 400 events are recorded in the equipment controller. When this limit is exceeded, each new
event will overwrite the oldest event.

MESSAGES DISPLAYED IN WEB LCT PAGE
At the opening of WEB LCT page, one of the following messages can be displayed:
Welcome in the WebLct Software upload utility.... The WEB LCT program is not present on the equip-
ment you wish to connect to. Update the WEB LCT application.
Invalid User!. It means that the typed username is wrong and/or not present in the equipment user list
or that the user password is wrong.
The equipment is update protected by element manager, retry to login as Read Only user. It means
that the equipment is managed also by the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system and the
NMS5UX user has prevented the possibility, for the SCT/LMT user, to be able to execute the login of
the equipment. In this case, it is necessary that the NMS5UX user enables again the SCT/LMT user for
the execution of the operation.
Too many WEB users!. It means that the equipment has been connected to the maximum number of
allowed users (see Limits).
Compatibility issue found. The Equipment software version is greater/lower than WebLct version. This
may cause unpredictable problems, means that the firmware version present on the equipment is not
compatible with the version of WEB LCT. Update the firmware of the equipment.
When the WEB LCT page is open, self-explanatory messages are usually displayed about the result of an
operation or the impossibility to carry out an action because of the incongruence of the selected parame-
ters.
Moreover, one of the following messages can be displayed:
SYSTEM OFFLINE. The equipment is in disconnected status. In this condition, the parameters cannot
be verified/modified.
The browser sends the command of reconnection at regular intervals (timeout: 20 seconds) until when
the equipment returns in connected status or the WEB LCT page is closed. The Status parameter indi-
cates the operation in progress:
• Wait next attempt. The equipment has not replied to the first reconnection attempt. When time-
out is expired, the browser will attempt again.
• Reconnection failed. The equipment has not replied to next reconnection attempts. When time-
out is expired, the browser will attempt again.
• Reconnection in progress. The equipment is transmitting the re-connection command.
The Info: New attempt in... parameter indicates the period (expressed in seconds) between a connec-
tion attempt and the next one. In any moment, it is possible to execute an immediate connection at-
tempt, pressing Retry.
WARNING. Access enabled only for SYSTEM users. The selected command is available only to the user
with profile System.
You are forcing a manual operation. Operation timeout: <value>. The setting you wish to execute is a
manual operation subjected to timeout.
For each equipment, a timeout can be set after which the relevant active manual operations are auto-
matically deactivated. The wording No Timeout indicates that the timeout is disabled; this means that
a manual operation remains active until when the user deactivates it.
Loading... The request of data is in progress between the PC and the equipment
Updating..., Applying Changes... The sending of data is in progress between the PC and the equipment.
Operation Fail! Unable to Get or Update parameter(s). Wrong user profile or not logged yet! The oper-
ation cannot be executed because the user profile in use is not enabled to execute the action or is not
logged to the equipment yet.
Not Implemented Yet!. The command is not available for the current version of the program.

MENU AND COMMANDS (EQUIPMENT MENU)
Main. It manages the general equipment parameters: supervision ports configuration, Routing Table,
Performance Monitoring measures, etc.
Equipment. It manages the equipment general configuration: modulation, capacity, etc.
Synchronisation. It manages the sources and the outputs of synchronism.
Base Band. It manages the base band parameters.
Radio Branch. It manages the radio parameters.
Maintenance. It manages the loops, Radio BER, LAN statistics, RMON counters, etc.
The description of every single command indicates the status of login/user profile (User Profile parameter)
necessary to use the command itself or execute the relevant procedures.

MAIN
Equipment Properties. It manages the properties (identifier, addresses, reference date/time, etc.) and
executes the equipment software reset.
Port Configuration. It manages the network address and the supervision parameters of the equipment.
Routing Table. It manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address currently used by
the equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway).
Stored Routing Table. It manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address stored in
the equipment (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway).
Performance Monitoring. It manages the Performance Monitoring measures.
Report & Loggers Maint. It saves to file the equipment configuration, the status/alarm signals and the
operations executed by the users.
SNTP & Wake Up Config. It manages the automatic acquisition of the reference date/time of the equip-
ment from a network element and the Wake Up trap.
Software Info & Maint. It manages the equipment firmware, the WEB LCT software present in the equip-
ment, the communication stack used by the equipment and the restore of the default equipment set-
tings.
Backup/Restore Config. It manages the backup/restore from file of the whole equipment configuration.
Alarm Severity Config. It manages the alarm transmission and their severity level.
User Manager. It manages the list of the equipment users.

Equipment Properties
The Equipment Properties command allows managing the equipment properties and executing the soft-
ware reset.
In detail, the command allows:
GENERAL INFO
Verify the equipment properties (type, ID, SNMP IP address, etc.)
Modify the equipment identifier
Modify the IP address of the SNMP agent of the equipment
Align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC
EQUIPMENT ADDRESSES
Verify the equipment addresses
EQUIPMENT FEATURES
Verify the functionalities enabled for the equipment
Enable the new functionalities
EQUIPMENT UNITS
Verify the equipment units
SOFTWARE RESET
Execute the equipment software reset
The selection of the command displays the Equipment Properties contextual area
Verify the equipment properties (type, ID, SNMP IP address, etc.)
1. Select Main > Equipment Properties.

The General Info tab displays the equipment general properties.
Modify the equipment identifier
2. Press Change at the side of the Equipment ID parameter.
3. Type an alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 31 characters.

Modify the IP address of the SNMP agent of the equipment

2. Press Change at the side of the Agent IP Address parameter.
3. Type the new IP address.
Align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC
WARNING The operation could cause the logout of the user.

The Equipment Date/Time parameter indicates the reference date/time of the equipment.
2. Press Align to PC time and confirm.
The value present in the box Equipment Date/Time is updated by the value of one’s PC.
Verify the equipment addresses
2. Select the Network tab.

The tab displays the following equipment addresses (Ethernet port, MAC address).
Verify the functionalities enabled for the equipment

2. Select the Equipment Features tab.
The tab displays the functionalities enabled on demand.
WARNING In order to enable one or more functionalities, IT IS NECESSARY to require the enabling certif-
icate, represented by a file (with sfc extension), to the company that provides the equipment.
For each equipment you wish to enable one or more functionalities, a specific enabling certificate is re-
quired, because there is an univocal link between each single certificate and each specific equipment.

2. Select the Equipment Feature tab.
3. Press Browse.
4. Select the enabling certificate (file with sfc extension).

5. Press Open.
The selected file is indicated in the File name box.
6. Press Send Certificate File.

A message indicates the end and the result of the operation:
• Operation Done. The operation has been executed with success. When the equipment is restart-
ed, the new enabled features will be available.
• Invalid operation for this equipment…. The selected certificate and equipment are not compati-
ble (wrong serial number or wrong MIB version, etc.).
Verify the equipment units
2. Select the Equipment Units tab.

The tab displays the characteristics of the equipment units.
WARNING After the reset, all the values activated before the operation result as valid ones.

2. Press Restart Equip. and confirm.

Equipment Properties contextual area
In the contextual area are present the:

General Info tab. The tab displays the equipment properties (type, ID, SNMP IP address, firmware ver-
sion, WEB LCT ID and version, date/time, communication stack)
Network tab. The tab displays the equipment addresses (Ethernet port, MAC address).
Equipment Features tab. The tab displays the functionalities enabled for the equipment.
Equipment Units tab. The tab displays the equipment units.
Push-button:
Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Restart Equip. Execute the equipment software reset
General Info tab
The tab displays the general equipment parameters.

Equipment Type. Equipment type.
Equipment ID. Equipment identifier. Select the Change option Modify the equipment identifier.
Agent IP Address. IP Address assigned to the agent SNMP of the equipment. Select the Change option
Modify the IP address of the SNMP agent of the equipment.
Firmware Version. File name and version of the equipment firmware present on the memory bench
in use.
WEB LCT Version. WEB LCT ALFOplus version present into the equipment.
WEB LCT Product Code. Identification code of the WEB LCT ALFOplus application present into the
equipment.
Equipment Date/Time. Reference date/time of the equipment. Select the Align to PC time option
Align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC. The format of date/
time changes according to the setting made in the operating system.
IP/OSI Stack. Communication stack in use.
Related Topics
Update the firmware of the equipment
Update the WEB LCT application
Network tab
The tab displays the following equipment addresses:

Ethernet IP Address. IP Address of the communication port with the LAN network (Ethernet port).
Ethernet IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition of the Ethernet port.
Ethernet MAC Address. Physical address of the equipment.
Related Topics
Verify/modify the network address and the supervision parameters of the equipment

Equipment Features tab
The tab displays the list of the equipment functionalities enabled on demand:
Upgrade up to 4QAM. Maximum equipment modulation up to 4QAM.
Upgrade up to 7M (10 FCC). Channel spacing up to 7M.
Upgrade up to 28M (30 FCC). Channel spacing up to28M.

Radio payload Encryptions. Protection of radio data through encryption algorithm.
Upgrade up to 40M. Channel spacing up to 40M.
Eth transport. Enabling of Ethernet transport.
Eth OAM functionality. OAM-FM feature for Ethernet network.

SyncE & G8264 (quality sync). Use of Ethernet synchronism sources.
SSM G8264 (quality sync). Management of synchronisation quality.
OSPF. Management of OSPF routing protocol.

1588 support. Enabling of PTP IEEE1588 protocol for the synchronisation of Ethernet traffic.
packet processor (1). Optional Ethernet processing.
packet processor (2). Optional Ethernet processing.

Enhanced eth monitoring. Monitoring of enhanced Ethernet.
G8032 (Eth ring protection). Protection of the Ethernet traffic in a ring topology.
Security package (+SSH + SFTP). Protected access to the unit for management purposes.
For every functionality, the relevant enabling status is pointed out:

Enabled. The functionality is enabled.
Disabled. The functionality is not enabled.
Related Topics
Equipment Units tab
The table present in the tab, displays the characteristics of the equipment units
Every row of the table corresponds to an unit for which is displayed in the column:
Real Type. Unit type really present into the equipment. The wording Unequipped indicates that the
unit is not physically present into the equipment.
Expected Type. Foreseen unit type. The wording Unequipped indicates that the unit is not foreseen.
HW Ver. Unit version.

Part Number. Part Number of the unit.
Par. Part Num. Part Number of the group that contains the unit. Usually the group represents the
equipment part that can be replaced. Not all the unit are into a group. In this case the field will result
empty and the part that can be replaced will correspond to the unit itself.
Serial Number. Series Number of the group that contains the unit. If the unit is not contained into a
group (Par Part Num field empty), the Series Number refers to the unit.
Unit Alarms. Functional status of the unit. Each box identifies an alarm:
• Fail. The units is affected by a serious malfunctioning.
• Missing. The unit is not present in the equipment (Unequipped wording - Real Type param-
eter) even if foreseen (unit name - Expected Type parameter).
• Not Resp. The unit does not answer to the program interrogations.
• HW Mism. The real unit (Real Type parameter) is different from the foreseen one (Expected
Type parameter).
• SW Mism. The firmware version present into the controller of the peripheral unit (Actual Re-
lease) is different from the one of the memory bench in Running status (Release Bench...)
(see Verify the firmware version of the equipment).
The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:
• Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm active, respectively of Critical, Major, Minor, Warning
severity.
• Green. Alarm active with Status severity level.
• White. Alarm deactivated.

Port Configuration
The command Port Configuration manages the network address and the supervision parameters of the
equipment and allows resetting the equipment software.
SUPERVISION PARAMETERS
Restore the access to equipment CPU
SOFTWARE RESET
The selection of the command displays the Port Configuration contextual area
In order to deepen this topic, see Management configurations (more info)
WARNING The management configuration allowed for the equipment are shown in Tab.1.
1. Select Main > Port Configuration.

The Ethernet tab displays the IP address and the supervision parameters of the equipment:
• IP Address. IP address of the communication port with the LAN network.
To change the parameter, type the new IP address in the box.
The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant Net Mask field.
• Net Mask. Mask for the network address definition.
To change the parameter, type the new value in the box.
• LAN 1. Activation status of the supervision on the LAN 1:
• Disabled. The supervision is not active.
• In Band. The in band supervision is active. In this case, the parameter In Band VLan Id
must be configured.
To change the parameter, select the wished value in the box.
• LAN 2. Activation status of the supervision on the LAN 2:
• Local Access Only. Port LAN 2 can access only to local controller. The supervision network
is not connected to radio side.
• In Band. The in band supervision is active. In this case, the parameter In Band VLan Id
must be configured.
• Out Of Band. Out Of Band supervision is active.
• Drop Node. The port is reserved to the supervision and represents a point for the access
to the supervision network over the traffic.
• In Band VLan Id. VLAN identifier reserved for in band supervision.
When in band supervision is active (at least one LAN box set to In Band) IT IS NECESSARY to
reserve a VLan for this management.
To change the parameter, set a value between 1 and 4095. The activation of In Band Manage-
ment is immediately achieved by the activation of the box relevant to a port (restart is not nec-
essary).
Entering a value of In Band VLan Id already present in the VLAN table causes the display of a
proper warning message.

3. Press Store and confirm.
4. Press Restart and confirm.
Restore the access to equipment CPU
1. Connect to the equipment through the console port (round power supply connector) with the following
settings:
• Rate: 115200 baud/sec
• Parity bit: none
• 8 data bits
• 1 stop bit
2. Open a terminal window.
3. Login with the credentials (username and password) of WEB LCT.
4. Type the command: lao

The following access modality is restored:
• LAN 1: Disable
• LAN 2: Local Access Only
1. Select Main > Port Configuration.

Port Configuration contextual area
In the contextual area is present the:

Ethernet tab. The tab displays the IP address and supervision parameters of the equipment.
Push-button:
Restart. Execute the equipment software reset.
Store. Store the values into the equipment controller.
Retrieve. Read again the values set into the equipment controller.
Ethernet tab
The tab displays the equipment IP address and supervision parameters of the equipment.
IP Address. IP address of the communication port with the LAN network.
Net Mask. Mask for the network address definition.

LAN 1. Activation status of the supervision on the LAN 1:
• In Band. The in band supervision is active. In this case, LAN 1 must have option 802.1Q en-
abled in order to properly manage the single VLAN’s and the parameter In Band VLan Id must
be configured.
LAN 2. Activation status of the supervision on the LAN 2:

• Local Access Only. Port LAN 2 can access only to local controller. The supervision network is
not connected to radio side.
• In Band. The in band supervision is active. In this case, LAN 2 must have option 802.1Q en-
abled in order to properly manage the single VLAN’s and the parameter In Band VLan Id must
be configured.
• Out Of Band. Out Of Band supervision is active.
• Drop Node. The port is reserved to the supervision and represents a point for the access to
the supervision network over the traffic.
In Band VLan Id. VLAN identifier reserved for in band supervision.
Related Topics
Management configurations (more info)

Management configurations (more info)
The ports of the Ethernet Switch of ALFOplus equipment can be configured for the transport of the traffic
only or for the contemporary transport of traffic and supervision.
The available management configurations are reported in Tab.1.
Setting a specific management configuration introduces some restrictions on the setting of the Ethernet
Switch parameters (see Limitations in the configuration of the Ethernet Switch).
WARNING In case of wrong configuration relevant to Ethernet management settings, the access to the
equipment CPU can be restored (see Restore the access to equipment CPU).
Tab.1 - Management configurations (ALFOplus)
Management configuration Characteristics

LAN 1 LAN 2
Disabled Local Access The purpose of this configuration is to enable one port only to traffic and the other port only to
Only the supervision of the local unit.
The supervision transits only through LAN2 (Untagged).
The traffic transits only through LAN1 (Tagged/Untagged).
From LAN2 it is possible to reach only the local CPU. The local CPU cannot be reached from Radio
port.
Out of Band The purpose of this configuration is to enable one port only to traffic and the other port only to
the supervision.
The supervision transits only through LAN2 (Untagged) (out of band supervision active).
The whole network can be reached from LAN2 and from the Radio port.
In Band Not available
Disabled Not available
Drop Node Not available
In Band Local The purpose of this configuration is to enable one port only to traffic with a management VLAN
Access Only associated. The other port is reserved to the local access.
The supervision transits both through LAN1 (Tagged) and LAN2 (Untagged).
The whole network can be reached from LAN1 and from the Radio port. From LAN2 only the local
CPU can be reached.
Drop Node The purpose of this configuration is to enable one port only to traffic and to a supervision VLAN.
The second port is reserved to the supervision and represents a point for the access to the su-
pervision network over the traffic.
The supervision transits both through LAN1 (Tagged/Tag=In Band VLan ID) and from LAN2
(Untagged).
The whole network can be reached from LAN1, LAN2 and the Radio port.
In Band The purpose of this configuration is to enable two traffic ports with a supervision VLAN associ-
ated to both of them. There is visibility among all the ports (bridge) on all the VLAN’s.
The supervision transits both through LAN1 (Tagged/Tag=In Band VLan ID) and from LAN2
(Tagged/Tag=In Band VLan ID).
The traffic transits both from LAN1 and LAN2.
The whole network can be reached from LAN1, LAN2 and the Radio port.
Disabled The purpose of this configuration is to enable two traffic ports: a supervision VLAN is associated
only to the first port. There is visibility among all the ports (bridge) on all the VLAN’s, except for
supervision one.
The supervision transits only through LAN1 (Tagged/Tag=In Band VLan ID).
The traffic transits both from LAN1 and LAN2.
The whole network can be reached from LAN1 and from the Radio port.
Out of Band Not available

Routing Table
The Routing Table command manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address current-
ly used by the equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway).
Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway used by the equipment
Add an element to the Routing Table
Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table
Set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway
Delete the IP Address used as Default Gateway
The selection of the command displays the Routing Table contextual area
In order to deepen this topic, see Routing Table and Default Gateway (more info)
Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway used by the equipment
1. Select Main > Routing Table.

The Routing Table contextual area displays the setting of the static Routing Table and the Default Gate-
way address currently used by the equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway).
Add an element to the Routing Table

2. Press Add.
3. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the IP network or of the destination element.
4. Into the NetMask box, type the mask for the destination IP network
5. Into the Hop box, type the IP Address of the equipment acting as Gateway for the destination network.
6. Press Apply.
The new element is inserted into the table. The system records the new element into the currently used
Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing
Table).
Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table
2. Select the element of the Routing Table.

Multiple selections can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.
Items automatically inserted by the controller (items with Local protocol) cannot be deleted.
3. Press Remove and confirm.

The system deletes the element into the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into
the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).
Set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway
2. Into the Default Gateway box, type the IP Address of the equipment used as Default Gateway.
In the next box is automatically indicates the supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway
equipment corresponds to.
3. Press Apply (next to Delete push-button) and confirm.

The system inserts the new Default Gateway IP address into the currently used Routing Table (Running
Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).
The insertion of a new IP address used as Default Gateway can fail if the new IP address does not belong
to an IP network directly connected to the equipment interface.
Delete the IP Address used as Default Gateway
2. Press Delete and confirm.

The system deletes the Default Gateway IP address into the currently used Routing Table (Running
Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).

Routing Table contextual area
The contextual area shows the setting of the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address cur-
rently used by the equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway).
The table represents the Running Routing Table. Each row of the table corresponds to an item of the Rout-
ing Table. For every item, is pointed out in the column:
Destination. IP address of the IP network or of the destination element.
Net Mask. IP NetMask of the IP network or of the destination element.
Hop. IP address of the equipment that acts as Gateway.
Interface. Supervision port of the local equipment which the Gateway equipment is connected to:
• Lan. Communication port with the LAN network.
• <no wording>. Inner port (internal loopback).
Protocol. Modality of connection (direct or indirect) between specific port (Interface) and destination
IP network:
• Local. The IP network or the element are directly connected to the equipment interface. The
IP network or the element are automatically inserted by the equipment software.
• NetMgmt. The IP network or the element are not directly reachable from the equipment in-
terfaces. The IP network or the element have been manually inserted by the user (static el-
ement).
• Other. All the other situations not falling in one of the previous cases (this label generally
does not shown; it has been anticipated for future uses).
The Default Gateway parameter indicates the IP address of the equipment that acts as Running Default
Gateway. The following box indicates the supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway equipment
corresponds to.
Push-button:
Apply. Not available in this context.
Add. Add an element to the Routing Table.
Remove. Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table.
Apply. Set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway.
Delete. Delete the IP Address used as Default Gateway.
Related Topics
Routing Table and Default Gateway (more info)

WARNING When all the equipment belongs to the same IP network and sending packets to other networks
is not necessary, the Routing Table and the address of the Gateway equipment must not be necessarily
defined because the network can manage its own internal traffic.
Setting these parameter is necessary when equipment must send packets between two different networks,
then the traffic must be re-routed from a network to another one (routing functionality of the equipment).
Routing Table
The function of the Routing Table is the one to check the routing of the supervisory messages exchanged
among the elements (PCs, equipment, etc.), that use the TCP/IP protocol, from one network to the other
one.
Routing Table (Running)
Each equipment at its initialisation (start-up operation) automatically sets the elements of the Routing Ta-
ble that identify the supervisory ports of the equipment (communication ports provided with the equipment
for the input/output of the supervisory signal).
These elements are set according to the IP addresses assigned to each port.
If the user changes the IP address of a supervisory port, the system does not dynamically change it into
the equipment Routing Table. The equipment must be reset, because the elements of the Routing Table
are set at the equipment start-up.
If necessary, the user can add some other elements to these ones (automatically set).
The system records each new element (manually set) into the currently used Routing Table (Running Rout-
ing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table); the system
does not record the elements (automatically set) into the backup memory of the controller because they
are newly set at every equipment start-up.
The Running Routing Table is a static. The system updates this table, with the elements present in the
Stored Routing Table, at every equipment start-up.
Stored Routing Table
The equipment does not currently use the Stored Routing Table. This table becomes operative on the
equipment restart.
In fact, in this case, the system inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table into the Routing Table
used by the equipment (Running Routing Table). What just said is valid only for the elements whose router
equipment (Hop) is associated to an active interface.
The setting of the Stored Routing Table id necessary, for instance, when the user wants to change an ad-
dress of the equipment supervisory ports.
In this case, the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing Table) cannot be changed.
The changes have to be inserted into the Stored Routing Table. At the next equipment start-up, the system
inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table into the Routing Table used by the equipment.
Default Gateway
The system forwards to the equipment with the Default Gateway function the data that have a receiver
unreachable through the routes present into the Routing Table.

The Stored Routing Table command manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address
stored in the equipment (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway).
Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway present into the backup memory of the controller
Add an element into the Stored Routing Table
Remove one or more elements from the Stored Routing Table
Set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table
Delete the IP address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table
The selection of the command displays the Stored Routing Table contextual area
In order to deepen this topic, see Routing Table and Default Gateway (more info)
Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway present into the backup memory
of the controller
1. Select Main > Stored Routing Table.

The Stored Routing Table contextual area displays the setting of the static Routing Table and the De-
fault Gateway address present in the backup memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table
and Stored Default Gateway).
Add an element into the Stored Routing Table
2. Press Add.
3. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the IP network or of the destination element.
4. Into the NetMask box, type the mask for the destination IP network
5. Into the Hop box, type the IP Address of the equipment acting as Gateway for the destination network.
6. Into the Interface box, set the supervisory port of the local equipment which the Gateway equipment
is connected to:
7. Press Apply.
The system inserts the new element into the table.
8. Press Save and confirm.

The system saves the new element into the backup memory of the equipment.
The system records the new element ONLY into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing
Table). At the next equipment start-up, the system will insert this new element also in the current rout-
ing table (Running Routing Table). What just said is valid only for the elements whose equipment (Hop)
is associated to an active interface.

Remove one or more elements from the Stored Routing Table
2. Select the element of the Stored Routing Table.


The system removes the element from the backup memory of the equipment.
The system deletes the element ONLY from the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Ta-
ble). At the next equipment start-up, the system will delete this element even in the current Routing
Table (Running Routing Table).
Set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table

2. Into the Default Gateway box, type the IP Address of the equipment used as Default Gateway.
3. Into the next box, set the supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway equipment corresponds
to:
4. Press Apply (next to Delete push-button) and confirm.

The system saves the new IP address of Default Gateway into the backup memory of the equipment.
The system records the IP address of Default Gateway ONLY into the backup memory of the equipment
(Stored Routing Table). The equipment will display this IP address only at the next restart of the equip-
ment.
Delete the IP address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table

2. Press Delete and confirm.

The system removes the IP address of Default Gateway from the backup memory of the equipment.

Stored Routing Table contextual area
The contextual area shows the setting of the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address present
in the backup memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway).
The table represents the Stored Routing Table. Every row of the table corresponds to an element of the
Routing Table. For every element, is pointed out in the column:
Destination. IP address of the IP network or of the destination element.
Net Mask. IP NetMask of the IP network or of the destination element.
Hop. IP address of the equipment that acts as Gateway.
Interface. Supervision port of the local equipment which the Gateway equipment is connected to:
The Default Gateway parameter indicates the IP address of the equipment that acts as Stored Default
Gateway. The next box indicates the supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway equipment cor-
responds to.
Push-button:
Refresh. Read again the data from the memory of the equipment after a Retrieve command. For in-
stance, if the user wants updating the Stored Routing Table displaying the elements manually added
by the user into the Running Routing Table, he has to press Retrieve and later the Refresh one.
Add. Add an element into the Stored Routing Table.

Remove. Remove one or more elements from the Stored Routing Table.
Retrieve. Read again the data from the backup memory and load them into the equipment memory.
Save. Save the elements of the table into the backup memory of the equipment.
Apply. Set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table.
Delete. Delete the IP address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table.
Related Topics

Performance Monitoring
The Performance Monitoring command manages the Performance Monitoring measures.

Verify the status of the PM measures
Activate a PM measure
Activate all PM measures in a group contemporaneously
Deactivate a PM measure
Deactivate all PM measure in a group contemporaneously
Display the results and the threshold exceeding alarms;
Reset the values of the control parameters;
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms;
Set the thresholds of the control parameters and of the alarms
for the:
G828 Radio <radio branch> measure
ACM Radio <radio branch> measure
RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure
TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure
The selection of the command displays the Performance Monitoring contextual area
In order to deepen this topic, see:

Measures available for ALFOplus equipment
Quality parameters description (PM measures)
PM measures (more info)
Verify the status of the PM measures
1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.

The Performance Monitoring contextual area displays the PM measures available.
The measures are subdivided in groups.
Selecting a group, the list of the measures associated to the group can be expanded.
The measures of only one group at a time can be displayed.
The group and the relevant measures available for the ALFOplus equipment are the following:
G828 group:
G828 Radio <radio branch> measure, checks the quality of the received signal at radio side.
RxPwr group:
RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure, checks the power of the signal at reception.
TxPwr group:
TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure, checks the power of the signal at transmission.
ACM group:
ACM Radio <radio branch> measure, traces the trend of the ACM profiles in the time.
Next to every measure, the relevant status is displayed:

• Stopped. The measure is not on progress.
• Running. The measure is on progress.

2. Select the group that contains the measure.

• Press Start next to the measure in Stopped status to be activated and confirm.
The measure is started-up and its status switches from Stopped to Running.
• Press Show next to the measure in Stopped status to be activated.
In the <PM measure name> window, select the Start command and confirm.
The measure is started-up.
Activate all PM measures in a group contemporaneously
2. Select the group.

3. Press Start Current and confirm.
The not active measures are started and their status passes from Stopped to Running.
2. Select the group that contains the measure.

• Press Stop next to the measure in Running status to be deactivated and confirm.
The measure is stopped and its status switches from Running to Stopped.
• Press Show next to the measure in Running status to be deactivated.
In the <PM measure name> window, select the Stop command and confirm.
The measure is stopped.
Deactivate all PM measure in a group contemporaneously
2. Select the group.
3. Press Stop Current and confirm.

The active measures are stopped and their status passes from Running to Stopped.

The G828 Radio <radio branch> measure checks the quality of the received signal at radio side.
The check consists of measuring the BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS quality parameters (see Quality parameters
description (PM measures). The parameters are implemented according to Rec. G.828 ITU-T.
In the Performance Monitoring contextual area, press Show at the side of the measure. The G828 Radio
<radio branch> window opens where it is possible:
Display the results and the threshold exceeding alarms (G828 Radio)
Reset the values of the records (daily and primary) (G828 Radio)
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms (G828 Radio)
Set the thresholds of the control parameters and of the alarms (G828 Radio)

2. Press Show next to the G828 Radio <radio branch> measure (G828 group).
The G828 Radio <radio branch> window displays the results of the measures and the status of the
alarms relevant to the exceeding of the threshold limits.
The window contains a table which lists the measure control parameters. For every parameter, the re-
sult of the measure is pointed out relevant to a given observation period (daily or primary record). In
detail, the column:
• Type. Control parameters: BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS.
Into the table, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the control parameters.
These results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or blocks.
See labels Seconds or Blocks.
• Curr. Day. Current daily record (24 hours).
• Last Day. Preceding daily record.
• Curr. 15m. Current primary record (15 minutes).
• 15m... 4h. 16 preceding primary records (each record is of 15 minutes).
What just said is valid from the second row of the table on, because the first row indicates the status
of the records (Counters Status). In detail, the wording:
• Meaningless. The record has been completely acquired and the measure is not affected by er-
rors.
• Meaningful. The record has been completely acquired and the measured control parameters
have not exceeded their threshold value.
• Incomplete. The record has not been completely acquired during the corresponding observation
period.
The measure starting record is always in this status. The daily record gets this status also when
only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status.
The daily record of the current date will be always an incomplete one because the daily records
are acquired at 23.59 of each day.
• Lost. The record has not reached the main controller of the equipment for instance because the
corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before it could have forwarded the
record itself or for generic hardware/software troubles.
• Restarted. The record has been lost after a reset of the NE.
When the NE has a software restart and checks that the measure is activated for a certain meas-
ure point, all the record coupled with this measure point will result in this status.
• ---. The record is not an available one because, during the observation period under examina-
tion, the measure was not activated.
The left side of the window displays the threshold exceeding alarms.
Each box represents an alarm. Box:
• 15M <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter into one
of the primary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window.

• 24H <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter into one
of the daily observation periods (24 hours) present into the window.
• UAS. Unavailability alarm.
• Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major,
Minor, Warning severity.
• Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.
• Grey. Alarm deactivated.
The window contains the following commands:

• Refresh. Update the data.
• Clear Counters. Reset the values contained into the records (daily or primary).
• Clear Alarms. Execute the reset of the alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding.
• Start. Active the measure. Command displayed in alternative to the Stop.
• Stop. Deactive the measure. Command displayed in alternative to the Start.
• Chart View. Not available for the current version of the application.
• Commons. Set the thresholds of the alarms relevant to the parameters.
The label:
• Seconds. Into the table there are the parameters that use the seconds as measuring unit.
• Blocks. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the blocks as measuring unit.
To change the type of displayed control parameters, select the arrow next to the box and choose the
new value from the list.
2. Press Show next to G828 Radio <radio branch> measure (group G828).
3. Select Clear Counters and confirm.

The values displayed into table are reset.
WARNING The operation affects all the actually active alarms with the exception of the UAS.
3. Select Clear Alarms and confirm.

All the active alarm status boxes are deactivated, except for the unavailability alarms.
3. Select Commons.
The Commons window displays a list of options on the left side. The selection of each single option dis-
plays, in the right part of the window, the relevant parameters:
• General. Threshold levels of UAS and SES parameters:

• N Ses Set UAS (P). Threshold - expressed as number of consecutive seconds with SES -
beyond which the UAS unavailability period starts.
To change the parameter, set a value between 1 and 10 sec (default 10).
• N Ses Reset UAS (Q). Threshold - expressed as number of consecutive seconds without
SES - beyond which the UAS unavailability period ends.
To change the parameter, set a value between 1 and 10 sec (default 10).
• N BBE Set Ses. Threshold - expressed by the percentage of the errored blocks - beyond
which a SES is declared.
To change the parameter, set a value between 1 and 100% (default 30%).
• 15M Es. Severity and threshold of 15M Es alarm:
• Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter, select the wished option.
• 15M Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute pe-
riod, when ES has occurred - beyond which the alarm is activated.
To change the parameter, set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0). Value 0 represents
the deactivation of the threshold and, as consequence, of the alarm.
To reset the value, press Reset and confirm.
• 24H Es. Severity and threshold of 24H Es alarm:
• 24H Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when ES has occurred - beyond which the alarm is activated.
To change the parameter, set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0). Value 0 repre-
sents the deactivation of the threshold and, as consequence, of the alarm.
• 15M Ses. Severity and threshold of 15M Ses alarm:
• 15M Ses Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute pe-
riod, when SES has occurred - beyond which the alarm is activated.
• 24H Ses. Severity and threshold of 24H Ses alarm:
• 24H Ses Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour peri-
od, when SES has occurred - beyond which the alarm is activated.
• 15M Sep. Severity and threshold of 15M Sep alarm:
• 15M Sep Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP events within a 15 minute
period - beyond which the alarm is activated.
• 24H Sep. Severity and threshold of 24H Sep alarm:
• 24H Sep Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP events within a 24 hour pe-
riod - beyond which the alarm is activated.
• UAS. UAS alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
Press Refresh to restore the values set at the opening of the window.

WARNING This measure is meaningful only when adaptive modulation is active.
The ACM Radio <radio branch> measure traces the trend of the ACM profiles in the time.
The trend is traced using one counter for each ACM profile and two further counters: UpShift and DownShift
(see Quality parameters description (PM measures).
In the Performance Monitoring contextual area, press Show at the side of the measure. The ACM Radio
Display the results and the threshold exceeding alarms (ACM Radio)
Reset the values of the records (daily and primary) (ACM Radio)
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms (ACM Radio)
Set the thresholds of the alarms (ACM Radio)
Modify the modality used to increase the counters (ACM Radio)
2. Press Show next to the ACM Radio <radio branch> measure (ACM group).
The ACM Radio <radio branch> window displays the results of the measures and the status of the
The window contains a table which lists the measure counters. For every counter, the result of the
measure is pointed out relevant to a given observation period (daily or primary record). In detail, the
column:
• Type. Counters. One counter is foreseen for every ACM profile: 4QAM Str, 4QAM, 16QAM Str,
16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, 256QAM, 512QAM, 1024QAM.
For every counter, the column of the specific observation period indicates (expressed in sec-
onds) the number of times the counter is increased.
The rule used to increased a counter changes according to the currently active modality (see
Policy parameter).
Besides one counter per modulation, two further counters are foreseen:
• DownShift. Number of times the profile, during the specific observation period, has
changed assuming a profile lower than the previous one.
• UpShift. Number of times the profile, during the specific observation period, has changed
assuming a profile higher than the previous one.
These results have been subdivided according to the counter type (see Seconds or UpDownShift
label).
rors.
period.

• 15M <counter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific counter into one of the primary ob-
servation periods (15 minutes) present into the window.
• 24H <counter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific counter into one of the daily obser-
vation periods (24 hours) present into the window.
The Policy box indicates the modality used to increase the counters:
• Active Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is equal to
the one currently active.
• Not Avail. Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is higher
than the current one and lower than or equal to the upper modulation threshold (Upper Modu-
lation).
Example. Suppose the ACM profile 128 QAM has been defined as Upper Modulation and the current
modulation is 16 QAM. If the active modality is:
• Active Mod, each second only the counter 16QAM is increased.
• Not Avail. Mod, each second the counters 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM are increased.

The label:
• Seconds. The counters relevant to the ACM profiles are present in the table.
• UpDownShift. The counters DownShift and UpShift are present in the table.
To change the type of displayed counters, select the arrow next to the box and choose the new value
from the list.
2. Press Show next to ACM Radio <radio branch> measure (group ACM).



3. Select Commons.
plays, in the right part of the window, the relevant counters:
• 15M 4QAM Str. Severity and threshold of 15M 4QAM Strong alarm:
• 15M 4QAM Str Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 min-
ute period, when the counter 4QAM Str has increased - beyond which the alarm is acti-
vated.
• 15M 4QAM. Severity and threshold of 15M 4QAM alarm:
• 15M 4QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute
period, when the counter 4QAM has increased - beyond which the alarm is activated.
• 15M 16QAM Str. Severity and threshold of 15M 16QAM Str alarm:
• 15M 16QAM Str Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 min-
ute period, when the counter 16QAM Str has increased - beyond which the alarm is ac-
tivated.

• 15M 1024QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 min-
ute period, when the counter 1024QAM has increased - beyond which the alarm is acti-
vated.
• 24H 4QAM Str. Severity and threshold of 24H 4QAM Str alarm:
• 24H 4QAM Str Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour
period, when the counter 4QAM Str has increased - beyond which the alarm is activated.
• 24H 4QAM. Severity and threshold of 24H 4QAM alarm:

• 24H 4QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour pe-
riod, when the counter 4QAM has increased - beyond which the alarm is activated.
• 24H 16QAM Str. Severity and threshold of 24H 16QAM Str alarm:
• 24H 16QAM Str Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour
period, when the counter 16QAM Str has increased - beyond which the alarm is activated.
• 24H 16QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour
period, when the counter 64QAM has increased- beyond which the alarm is activated.

3. Press Change.
4. In the Policy window, select the option:

• Active Modulation. Each second the counters, whose ACM profile is equal to the currently active
one, are increased.
• Not Available Modulation. Each second the counters, whose ACM profile is higher than the cur-
rent one and lower than or equal to the upper modulation threshold (Upper Modulation), are
increased.

The RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure checks the power of the signal at reception.
The check consists of measuring the RLTS, RLTM quality parameters specified by the Standard EN 301 129
of the ETSI (see Quality parameters description (PM measures).
In the Performance Monitoring contextual area, press Show at the side of the measure. The RXPwr Radio
Display the results and the threshold exceeding alarms (RxPwr Radio)
Reset the values of the records (daily and primary) (RxPwr Radio)
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms (RxPwr Radio)
Set the thresholds of the control parameters and of the alarms (RxPwr Radio)

2. Press Show next to the RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure (RxPwr group).
The RxPwr Radio <radio branch> window displays the results of the measures and the status of the
detail, the column:
• Type. Control parameters: TMMax, TMMin, Average Level, Rlts.
These results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or dBm. See
labels Rlts and TM.
rors.
period.

The Rlt... Thresh. boxes point out the threshold levels of the received power actually set. These param-
eters can be configured by the user.

The label:
• Rlts. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the seconds as measuring unit.
• TM. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the dBm as measuring unit.
2. Press Show next to RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure (group RxPwr).




3. Select Commons.
• 15M Rlts. Threshold and severity of 15M Rlts... alarms:
• Rlts 1, Rlts 2, Rlts 3, Rlts 4, Rlts 5 (Thresholds area). Threshold levels - expressed as
number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when the received power is lower than
the RLT1, RLT2, RLT3, RLT4, RLT5 threshold levels - beyond which the system activates
the relevant alarms.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between 1 and 900 (default
0). Value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and, as consequence, of the
alarm.
• Severity. Alarms severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
• 24H Rlts. Threshold and severity of 24H Rlts... alarms:
• Rlts 1, Rlts 2, Rlts 3, Rlts 4, Rlts 5 (Thresholds area). Threshold levels - expressed as
number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the received power is lower than the
RLT1, RLT2, RLT3, RLT4, RLT5 threshold levels - beyond which the system activates the
relevant alarms.
alarm.
• Rlt. Threshold levels of the received power:
• Rlt 1 <current value> dBm, Rlt 2 <current value> dBm, Rlt 3 <current value> dBm, Rlt
4 <current value> dBm, Rlt 5 <current value> dBm. Respectively the first, the second,
the third, the fourth and the fifth threshold level of the received power.
To change a threshold, move the cursor over a value between -100dBm and -20dBm.
Default: Rlt 1: -30dBm, Rlt 2: -40dBm, Rlt 3: -50dBm, Rlt 4: -60dBm, Rlt 5: -70dBm.
To restore the default of a parameter press the relevant Default push-button and confirm.

The TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure checks the power of the signal at transmission.
The check consists of measuring the TLTS, TLTM quality parameters, specified by the Standard EN 301 129
of the ETSI (see Quality parameters description (PM measures).
In the Performance Monitoring contextual area, press Show at the side of the measure. The TxPwr Radio
Display the results and the threshold exceeding alarms (TxPwr Radio)
Reset the values of the records (daily and primary) (TxPwr Radio)
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms (TxPwr Radio)
Set the thresholds of the control parameters and of the alarms (TxPwr Radio)

2. Press Show next to the TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure (TxPwr group).
The TxPwr Radio <radio branch> window displays the results of the measures and the status of the
detail, the column:
• Type. Control parameters: TMMax, TMMin, Average Level, Tlts.
These results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or dBm. See
labels Tlts and TM.
rors.
period.
ure point, all the record coupled with these measure point will result in this status.

The Tlt... Thresh. boxes point out the threshold levels of the transmitted power actually set. These pa-
rameters can be configured by the user.

The label:
• Tlts. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the seconds as measuring unit.
• TM. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the dBm as measuring unit.






3. Select Commons.
• 15M Tlts. Threshold and severity of 15M Tlts... alarms:
• Tlts 1, Tlts 2, Tlts 3, Tlts 4 (Thresholds area). Threshold levels - expressed as number of
seconds, within a 15 minute period, when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT1,
TLT2, TLT3, TLT4 threshold levels - beyond which the system activates the relevant
alarms.
alarm.
• 24H Tlts. Threshold and severity of 24H Tlts... alarms:
• Tlts 1, Tlts 2, Tlts 3, Tlts 4 (Thresholds area). Threshold levels - expressed as number of
seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT1,
TLT2, TLT3, TLT4 threshold levels - beyond which the system activates the relevant
alarms.
alarm.
• Tlt. Threshold levels of the transmitted power:
• Tlt 1 <current value> dBm, Tlt 2 <current value> dBm, Tlt 3 <current value> dBm, Tlt
4 <current value> dBm. Respectively the first, the second, the third and the fourth
threshold level of the transmitted power.
To change a threshold move the cursor over a value between -40dBm and 35dBm. De-
fault: Tlt 1: 10d Bm, Tlt 2: 13 dBm, Tlt 3: 15 dBm, Tlt 4: 18 dBm.
To restore the default of a parameter press the relevant Default push-button and confirm.
In equipment in protected configuration the variations of the thresholds executed on a branch
are not automatically reported even on the other branches.

Performance Monitoring contextual area
The contextual area shows the PM measures.

The measures are subdivided in groups.
Selecting a group, the list of the measures associated to the group can be expanded.
The measures of only one group at a time can be displayed.
The group and the relevant measures available for the ALFOplus equipment are the following:
G828 group. G828 Radio <radio branch> measure checks the quality of the received signal at radio
side.
RxPwr group. RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure checks the power of the signal at reception.
TxPwr group. TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure checks the power of the signal at transmission.
ACM group. ACM Radio <radio branch> measure traces the trend of the ACM profiles in the time.
Next to every measure the relevant status is pointed out:

• Stopped. The measure is not on progress.
• Running. The measure is on progress.
Next to every measure there are the push-buttons:

Start. Active the specific measure. Push-button displayed in alternative to the Stop.
Stop. Deactive the specific measure. Push-button displayed in alternative to the Start.
Show. Display the results and the threshold exceeding alarms of the specific measure.
Push-button:
Start Current. Activate all PM measures in a group contemporaneously.

Stop Current. Deactivate all PM measure in a group contemporaneously.
Related Topics


The measures available for ALFOplus equipment are the following.
G828 Radio <radio branch> measure. This measure checks the quality of the received signal at radio
side.
The check consists of measuring the BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS quality parameters.
The parameters are implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.
ACM Radio <radio branch> measure. This measure traces the trend of the ACM profiles in the time.
The trend is traced using one counter for each ACM profile and two further counters (UpShift and Down-
Shift).
The measure meaningful only when the adaptive modulation is active.
RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure. This measure checks the power of the signal at reception.
The check consists of measuring the RLTS, RLTM quality parameters specified by the Standard EN 301
129 of the ETSI.
TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure. This measure checks the power of the signal at transmission.
The check consists of measuring the TLTS, TLTM quality parameters, specified by the Standard EN 301
129 of the ETSI.

The quality parameters description of the G828 Radio <radio branch> measure is the following:
• BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one er-
rored bit not belonging to SES.
• ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks.
• SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored
blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm
equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame
Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.).
• SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES between
3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES.
• UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds.
The counting of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends
at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted
into the unavailability period. The Q and P values can be configured.
The quality parameters description of the ACM Radio <radio branch> measure is the following:
• 4QAM Str. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 4QAM Str. The rule used to increase the counter
changes according to the active increase mode (1).
• 4QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 4QAM. The rule used to increase the counter chang-
es according to the active increase mode (1).
• 16QAM Str. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 16QAM Str. The rule used to increase the coun-
ter changes according to the active increase mode (1).
• 16QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 16QAM. The rule used to increase the counter
• DownShift. Number of times the ACM profile, during the specific observation period, has
changed assuming an ACM profile lower than the previous one.
• UpShift. Number of times the ACM profile, during the specific observation period, has changed
assuming an ACM profile higher than the previous one.
(1) The counters relevant to the ACM profiles can be increased according to the following modes:
• Active Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is equal to
the one currently active.
• Not Avail. Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is higher
than the current one and lower than or equal to the upper modulation threshold (Upper Modu-
lation).
Example. Suppose the ACM profile 128 QAM has been defined as Upper Modulation and the current mod-
ulation is 16 QAM. If the active modality is:
• Active Mod, each second only the counter 16QAM is increased.
• Not Avail. Mod, each second the counters 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM are increased.

The mode used to increase the counters of the ACM profiles is common to all the counters and must be
selected by the user.
The quality parameters description of the RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure is the following:
• TMMax (Tide Mark Max). Maximum value reached by the power at reception (RL) during the
observation period (15 min or 24 hours).
• TMMin (Tide Mark Min). Minimum value reached by the power at reception (RL) during the ob-
servation period (15 min or 24 hours).
• Average Level. Average level of the power at reception (RL) during the observation period (15
min or 24 hours).
• Rlts (Received Level Threshold Second). Number of seconds where it has been detected that
the value of the power at reception (RL - Received Level) is lower than the preset threshold level.
A maximum of 5 threshold levels can be defined.
The quality parameters description of the TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure is the following:
• TMMax (Tide Mark Max). Maximum value reached by the power at transmission (TL) during the
• TMMin (Tide Mark Min). Minimum value reached by the power at transmission (TL) during the
• Average Level. Average level of the power at transmission (TL) during the observation period
(15 min or 24 hours)
• Tlts (Transmitted Level Threshold Second). Number of seconds where it has been detected that
the value of the power at transmission (TL - Transmitted Level) is higher than the preset thresh-
old level. A maximum of 4 threshold levels can be defined.

A PM measure consists of recording, during a pre-defined time range (observation period), the values of
specific parameters.
Some threshold limits have been assigned to these control parameters (the setting of the thresholds can
be changed).
The exceeding of the threshold limit indicates a more or less serious degradation of the signal. This condi-
tion generates an alarm.
The alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding are treated by the equipment and by the application as
normal alarms. The only exception is that the alarm is not automatically reset at the return into the thresh-
old limit but the user has to execute the reset of this kind of alarms.
The control parameters under examination change according to the equipment type and to the measure
type supported by that type of equipment. Usually, all the executed measures refer to ITU-T Recommen-
dations (for instance G.828, G.826, etc.).
The activation (and the deactivation) of the PM measures can be executed only after a command forwarded
by the user.
When it has been activated a PM measure, the main controller of the equipment starts the storing of the
values relevant to the control parameters. The results of the measures are sub-divided into records. Each
record contains the values recorded into a specific time range (observation period).
If at the end of the observation period, the measure has not yet been deactivated the system starts another
observation period and so on until when the operator stops the measure.
The equipment group the results of the PM measures into observation period of 15 minutes (primary re-
cords) and of 24 hours (daily records).
The observation periods cannot be synchronized with the instant when the measure is activated, but this
records refer, for the primary records, to the quarter of an hour (00.00, 00.15, 00.30, etc.) and, for the
daily records, to the time 00.00 UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated).
For instance, if a measure starts at 11.40, the first primary record will have as observation period the time
11.40...11.45 (corresponding to the time range 11.30...11.45), while the first daily record will have as ob-
servation period 11.40...00.00.
When the user requires the display of the results of the PM measures, the daily and primary records rele-
vant to the running PM measures are displayed in the WEB LCT page of the equipment.
For each type of measure, the equipment keeps stored the current records and also the last 16 primary
records (corresponding to the last 4 hours) and the last daily one (corresponding to the preceding day).
The preceding records are overwritten.
When the operator stops a measure, the system stores the uncompleted current record.
If the operator activates and deactivates the measure more times during the same observation period, the
system will store the record that contains the results of the last executed measure.
For instance if the measure has been activated at 9.02 and deactivated at 9.07, then it has been newly
activated at 9.09, the record relevant to the observation period 9.00...9.15 will contain the results of the
measures relevant to the period 9.09...9.15, while the ones relevant to the period 9.02...9.07 will not be
stored.
If some PM measures are in progress on an equipment and this is restarted or turned off, at the next re-
start/start-up the measures active before the turn-off will be automatically restarted.
The records (primary and daily), relevant to the period when the measure has been stopped, will result
empty and when the limit of 16 primary records and 1 daily one is reached, they will overwrite the previous
records.

Report & Loggers Maint.
The Report & Loggers Maint. command saves to file the equipment configuration, the status/alarm sig-
nals and the operations executed by the users.
Save the configuration, the alarms and the operations executed by the users to file
Delete the alarms stored into the equipment controller
Delete the operations list stored into the equipment controller
The selection of the command displays the Report & Loggers Maint contextual area
Save the configuration, the alarms and the operations executed by the users to file
User Profile | Read Only, Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING In order to execute this operation, the display of menu bar in the browser must be active.
1. Select Main > Report & Loggers Maint.

2. Activate, in the Report Options area, the information you wish to save to file:
• Inventory report. Whole equipment configuration: WEB LCT version, properties, list of units, sta-
tus/version of the firmware, addresses, routing table, default gateway, remote equipment list,
User Inputs, User Outputs, operating parameters, etc.
• Fault report. List of status/alarm signals currently active on the equipment (current alarms) and
signals stored in the equipment controller (alarm history).
• Command Log. List of the operations, executed by the WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX users,
stored in the equipment controller.
It is possible to select one or more options. Depending on the activated options, a file will be created
containing the relevant data.
3. Press Generate Report.

In sequence, are displayed:
• The WEB Report page, where the information, which will be saved to file depending on the ac-
tivated options, are pointed out.
Here below the description of the parameters present in the WEB page is reported.
• A window displaying the save mode of the file according to the browser currently in use.
4. Follow the instructions in the window to save the file.

The format, used to save the data to file, is the same displayed in the Report WEB page.
Report WEB page
The WEB page Report, depending on the activated options, indicates:
Web LCT Version. WEB LCT ALFOplus version present into the equipment.
Equipment Configuration, ACM Table, General Preset, etc. Equipment parameters. The whole
equipment parameters are subdivided in groups. The format of the parameters present in each group
is self-explicative and changes according to the type of represented data.
Command Logger. Operations list. Every record identifies an operation for which are reported:
• Date/Time. Date and time when it has been executed the operation. The format of date/time
changes according to the setting made in the operating system.
• Source address. IP address of the machine from which it has been executed the operation.
• User. Name of the user who has executed the operation.
• Object. Object to which the operation refers.
• Instance. Name of the equipment instance to which the operation refers.

• Value Set. Set value.
The presence of the symbol … indicates that the information is not available, because not meaningful
for the relevant type of operation.
Current Alarm. Each record identifies a signal, for which the system reports:
• Severity. Type of signal:
• Status. Status signal
• Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. Alarm detected coupled respectively with the Warning,
Minor, Major or Critical severity.
• Date/Time. Detection or reset date and time of the signal. The format of date/time changes ac-
cording to the setting made in the operating system.
• Description. Alphanumeric string that specify the type of the signal.
Alarm Log. Alarms history. Every record identifies a signal for which is reported:
• Severity. Type of signal:
• Disable. Alarm signal reset
• Status. Status signal
• Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. Alarm detected coupled respectively with the Warning,
Minor, Major or Critical severity.
• Date/Time. Detection or reset date and time of the signal. The format of date/time changes ac-
cording to the setting made in the operating system.
• Description. Alphanumeric string that specify the type of the signal. If:
• The wording CLEARED is absent, the record refers to a detected alarm.
• The wording CLEARED is present, the record refers to a cleared alarm.
Delete the alarms stored into the equipment controller
2. Press Delete all alarm logger events and confirm.

A message indicates the end and the result of the operation.
Delete the operations list stored into the equipment controller

2. Press Delete all command logger items and confirm.
A message indicates the end and the result of the operation.

Report & Loggers Maint contextual area
The contextual area displays the information which can be saved to file.
Inventory report. Whole equipment configuration: WEB LCT version, properties, list of units, status/
version of the firmware, addresses, routing table, default gateway, remote equipment list, User Inputs,
User Outputs, operating parameters, etc.
Fault report. List of status/alarm signals currently active on the equipment (current alarms) and sig-
nals stored in the equipment controller (alarm history).
Command Log. List of the operations, executed by the WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX users, stored
in the equipment controller.
It is possible to select one or more options. Depending on the activated options, a file will be created con-
taining the relevant data.
Push-button:
Generate Report. Save the configuration, the alarms and the operations executed by the users to file
Delete all alarm logger events. Delete the alarms stored into the equipment controller
Delete all command logger items. Delete the operations list stored into the equipment controller.

SNTP & Wake Up Config.
The SNTP & Wake Up Config. command manages the automatic acquisition of the reference date/time
of the equipment from a network element (SNTP functionality) and the Wake Up trap (Wake Up function-
ality).
Verify the status of SNTP functionality
Set the execution parameters and activate the SNTP functionality
Disable the SNTP functionality
Verify the Wake Up functionality status
Set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality
Disable the Wake Up functionality
The selection of the command displays the SNTP & Wake Up Config. contextual area

SNTP functionality (more info)
Wake Up functionality (more info)
Verify the status of SNTP functionality
1. Select Main > SNTP & Wake Up Config.

The SNTP tab displays the activation status of SNTP functionality and the current setting of the relevant
execution parameters.
WARNING The execution parameters (Main Server IP Address, Reserve Server IP Addr, etc.) can be mod-
ified even when the SNTP functionality is already active.
2. Set the IP address of the main element present in the network, from which the equipment automatically
gets the reference date/time, in the Main Server IP Address box.
Typing a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0) involves the activation of the automatic acquisition of the
reference date/time.
3. Set the IP address of the secondary element present in the network, from which the equipment auto-
matically gets the reference date/time, in the Reserve Server IP Addr box.
4. Set the time interval between a request of refresh of the reference date/time and the next one in the
Polling Interval (Sec.) box.
Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 1 and 16777215 seconds.
5. Set the time interval (t) the equipment must wait for, before re-attempting the transmission of a re-
quest to the main or secondary element in the Polling Timeout (Sec.) box.
Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 1 and 30 seconds.
6. Set the number of times that the equipment must re-attempt the transmission of a request to the main
or secondary element in the Polling Retries box.
Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 1 and 10.

2. Reset the value present in the Main Server IP Address box.

The value can be reset deleting the IP address present in the box or setting the value 0.0.0.0.
3. Reset the value present in the Reverse Server IP Address box.
The value can be reset deleting the IP address present in the box or setting the value 0.0.0.0.
Verify the Wake Up functionality status
2. Select the Wake Up tab.

The tab displays the sending status of the Wake Up trap and the current setting of the relevant sending
parameters.
WARNING The execution parameters (NMS IP Address, Timeout, etc.) cannot be modified when the Wake
Up functionality is already active. First it is necessary Disable the Wake Up functionality and then the pa-
rameters can be changed.

3. Set the IP address of the server, which the Wake Up trap must be sent to, in the NMS IP Address box.
4. Set, in the Timeout (Minutes) box, the time interval for which the Wake Up trap is sent. When the time-
out expires, the trap is automatically disabled.
Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 0 and 1440 minutes.
The setting of the value 0 indicates that the trap is sent until when the user manually disables it or the
NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.
5. Set the physical location (for example, the name of the site) of the equipment in the NE Location box.
The setting of the parameter is optional.
6. Select the Enable option.
3. Select the Disable option or reset the value present in the NMS IP Address box (value 0.0.0.0).

SNTP & Wake Up Config. contextual area

SNTP tab. The tab displays the configuration parameters of the SNTP functionality.
Wake Up tab. The tab displays the configuration parameters of the Wake Up functionality.
Push-button:
SNTP tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the SNTP functionality.
Main Server IP Address / Reserve Server IP Addr. Activation status and IP address of the main
NE (Main) and of the secondary NE (Reserve) present in the network which the equipment automati-
cally gets the reference date/time from. In detail, the automatic acquisition of the reference date/time
of the equipment is:
• Active, when a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0) is present in the Main Server IP Address
and/or Reverse Server IP Address box.
• Inactive, when the value 0.0.0.0 (IP address reset) is present in the boxes Main Server IP
Address and Reverse Server IP Address.
Polling Interval (Sec.). Time interval (expressed in seconds) between a request of reference date/
time update and the next one.
Polling Timeout (Sec.). Time interval (expressed in seconds) that the equipment must wait before
re attempting the transmission of a request to the main or secondary element.
Polling Retries. Number of times that the equipment must re attempt the transmission of a request
to the main or secondary element.
NTP Server Lost Alarm. The activation of the NTP Server Lost Alarm indicates that none of the set
network elements is reachable, as consequence the reference date/time of the equipment is not
aligned. The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:
• Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Ma-
jor, Minor, Warning severity.
Related Topics
Wake Up tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the Wake Up functionality.
Status. Transmission status of Wake Up trap. The sending of the Wake Up trap is:
• Active, when the Enable option is selected and a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0) is set
as IP address of the server (option NMS IP Address).
• Inactive, when the Disable option is selected and the value 0.0.0.0 is set as IP address of
the server (option NMS IP Address).

NMS IP Address. IP address of the server which the Wake Up trap must be sent to. With server we
mean the machine where the supervision system NMS5UX, NMS5UX-B or NMS5LX or a different man-
agement system, able to manage the reception of the Wake Up trap, is installed.
Gosip Address. Not available in this context.
Timeout (Minutes). Time interval for which the Wake Up trap, when enabled, is sent to the server.
The setting of the value 0 indicates that the trap is sent until when the user manually disables it or the
NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.
NE Location. Optional parameter. The user can insert the physical location (for example the name of
the site) of the equipment in this field. This information is communicated to the remote manager to-
gether with the characteristics of the equipment. The supervision system NMS5UX, NMS5UX-B or
NMS5LX does not use this information.
Related Topics

ALFOplus equipment, via SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) protocol, can update its date/time using
an element within the network as reference (SNTP functionality).
Via WEB LCT (or SCT/LMT) application, a maximum of two elements can be defined, one main (set in the
Main Server IP Address box) and one secondary (set in the Reserve Server IP Addr box), from which the
equipment automatically gets the reference date/time each n seconds (set in the Polling Interval box). En-
tering a valid value for the main and/or secondary element activates the functionality.
If the main element does not answer to the request of updating of the equipment reference date/time, this
request is sent for n times (set in the Polling Retries box) each t seconds (set in the Polling Timeout box).
At the end of this requests, if the main element does not answer, the equipment requires the updating of
the date/time to the secondary element.
If the secondary element does not answer to the request of updating of the equipment reference date/
time, this request is sent for n times each t seconds. At the end of this request, if the secondary element
does not answer the equipment, the system activates the SNTP servers lost Alarm and requires the update
of the date/time of the main element and so on.
If no network element set can be reached, the reference date/time of the equipment is not updated. This
condition is signalled by the activation of NTP Server Lost Alarm (SNTP tab).
To deactivate the automatic acquisition of the reference date/time, the IP address of the main and second-
ary elements must be reset.
The Wake Up functionality allows the user enabling the spontaneous forward, from the equipment to a re-
mote server, of a SNMP trap for the notification of the equipment commissioning (Wake Up trap).
This functionality has been implemented as help to the Auto Discovery modality available in the supervision
systems NMS5UX, NMS5UX-B and NMS5LX.
The Auto Discovery mode has the purpose to point out new equipment in the network, not managed by
the supervision system yet. More information about the Auto Discovery modality is reported in the relevant
documentation.
This chapter shows only the management of the Wake Up trap by the equipment. In detail, the implemen-
tation of the Wake Up functionality is the following.
Via WEB LCT (or SCT/LMT) application, it is possible:

• Define the IP address of the server where the supervision system, which the trap must be sent
to (NMS IP Address option - Wake Up tab) is installed.
• Define the time interval for which the trap must be sent, after which the sending of the trap is
automatically disabled (Timeout option).
If the value 0 is set for the Timeout option, the Wake Up trap will be sent until when the user
manually disables it or the NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.
• Activate and deactivate the sending of the trap.
To activate the Wake Up functionality, it is necessary to set a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0)
for the IP address of the server (NMS IP Address option) and select the Enable option.
To deactivate the functionality, it is necessary to select the Disable option or reset the NMS IP
Address option (value 0.0.0.0).
When the Wake Up functionality is activated, the equipment starts sending the Wake Up trap every minute
for the time interval defined by the user (Timeout option). For example, if the value 60 has been set as
timeout, the trap is sent each 60 minutes. At the end of 60 minutes, the sending of the trap is automatically
disabled.
If, in the period when the sending of the trap is enabled, the supervision system intercepts the Wake Up
notification records the presence of the new equipment in its database and disables the sending of the
Wake Up trap by the equipment (trap switch-off).

Software Info & Maint.
The Software Info & Maint. command manages the equipment firmware, the WEB LCT software present
in the equipment, the communication stack used by the equipment and the restore of the default equip-
ment settings.
EQUIPMENT FIRMWARE
Verify the firmware version of the equipment

Switch the operation of the memory benches relevant to the main controller
WEB LCT
Verify the WEB LCT version present into the equipment
COMMUNICATION STACK/FACTORY DEFAULT

Verify the communication stack in use
Restore Factory Default of the equipment
SOFTWARE RESET
The selection of the command displays the Software Info & Maint contextual area

Equipment firmware (more info)
Factory Default of the equipment (more info)
Rescue connection (more info)
Verify the firmware version of the equipment
1. Select Main > Software Info & Maint.

The Equipment Firmware tab shows version, status and composition of the equipment firmware.
WARNING The application automatically updates the firmware of the memory bench not on progress or not
present (Bench Status parameter - Loaded or Not Loaded value).
This operation cannot be executed when the firmware update is already in progress (Download Status pa-
rameter - Downloading value).
The firmware update procedure could change the equipment functions.
1. If not already active, run the WEB LCT Console program or the SCT/LMT program, necessary to manage
the operation of FTP for the file transfer.
3. Press Upgrade.

4. In the box Download file path, type the path and the name of the file you wish to use for update.
The file you wish to use for the operation must be on the local PC (PC where the browser used for the
display of WEB LCT is running).
5. Set the download type to be executed, selecting the option:

• Forced, if you are updating the firmware of main controller of the equipment.
• Only difference or not present / peripheral, if you are updating the firmware of peripheral units
(FPGA file and/or application code).
6. Activate the Bench Switch? box, if at the end of the download, the system has automatically to execute
a switching of the memory bench, in such a way to use the bench with the firmware that has been
updated.
7. Press Start and confirm.

Before executing the updating, the system executes a compatibility check between the file to be for-
warded to the equipment and the one present on the terminal.
The check consists of comparing the technology type of the equipment.
If the parameters are incompatible, the application does not executes the firmware update: the wording
Interrupted is displayed in the Download Status box of the branch whose firmware you are updating.
If the parameters are compatible, the operation is started and the Download Status box of the branch
whose firmware you are updating dynamically updates the progress of the operation, which requires
some minutes:
• Downloading. The operation is running.
The Abort push-button, present in the Download Status box during the firmware update, can
be used to stop the operation. Its selection requires the confirmation.
During the updating, the system deletes the firmware present into the bench memory and it up-
dates the firmware of the equipment one component at a time.
If the operation is stopped, into the memory bench there will be only the already updated com-
ponents. In this case, the new version can result unusable because not integral (the bench will
be in Not Loaded status).
In this case, the controller keeps the minimum functions necessary to allow a new firmware up-
date.
• Complete. The update operation is ended.
The Software Version box indicates the new firmware version.
Switch the operation of the memory benches relevant to the main controller
WARNING Memory benches cannot be switched during the firmware update (Download Status parameter
- Downloading value) and when the firmware of the equipment is not present on a bench (Bench Status
parameter - Not Loaded value).
Usually, the switch of the memory benches of main controller does NOT interrupt the traffic. This operation
can temporarily interrupt the traffic if the new loaded version contains a new FPGA version.
2. Press Bench Switch and confirm.

The equipment is restarted; on the reconnection, the bench in Running status is forced to Loaded status
and vice versa.
Verify the WEB LCT version present into the equipment
2. Select the WEB LCT tab tab.

The tab displays the characteristics of WEB LCT application present in the equipment.

2. Select the Web LCT tab.
3. Press Browse.
4. Select the file (with tar extension) you wish to use for the update.
The File name box displays the selected file.
5. Press Upload and the confirm.

Before starting the update, the compatibility between the WEB LCT which must be sent to the equip-
ment and the one present in the terminal is checked.
The check consists in comparing the type of equipment.
If the parameters are not compatible, the application does not execute the update of WEB LCT (the
system displays the message Upload aborted. Probable cause wrong...).
If the parameters are compatible, the operation is started. The update requires some minutes.
At the end of the operation, to avoid the misalignment between the displayed data and the new appli-
cation, the WEB LCT page is closed and the page Login is displayed.
Verify the communication stack in use

2. Select the IP/OSI stack switch tab.
The tab displays the communication stack in use.
Restore Factory Default of the equipment
WARNING The operation, if executed on an equipment subjected to the radio supervision, could cause the
loss of the link because the restore of the factory settings involves the re-channelling of the radios to the
default values.
3. Activate the Factory Default check-box.
4. Press Apply.
5. Into the Please insert system password box, type the access code of System user and press OK.
At the end of the operation, the message The new settings will be active after a software restart is dis-
played.
6. Press OK to close the window.

The default configuration will be automatically applied at the equipment restart (see Factory Default of
the equipment (more info).


Software Info & Maint contextual area

Equipment Firmware tab. The tab displays the version and the status of the equipment firmware.
WEB LCT tab. The tab displays the characteristics of the WEB LCT application present in the equipment.
IP/OSI stack switch tab. The tab displays the communication stack in use.
Push-button:
Equipment Firmware tab
The tab shows the version, the status and the composition of the equipment firmware.
The tab contains two tables.
The first table displays the version and the status of the equipment firmware.
Software Version. File name and version of the equipment firmware respectively present on the
memory bench 1 (Bench 1 column) and 2 (Bench 2 column).
Bench Status. Operating status of memory benches 1 (Bench 1 column) and 2 (Bench 2 column):
• Running. The firmware is running on the relevant memory bench.
• Loaded. The firmware is present on the bench, but it is not currently running (standby).
• Not Loaded. The firmware is not present in the memory bench.
Download Status. Status of the update operation of the firmware respectively present on memory
bench 1 (Bench 1 column) and 2 (Bench 2 column):
• ---. Firmware update is not in progress.
• Downloading. The update of the firmware relevant to the memory bench is in progress.
• Interrupted. The update of the firmware has been interrupted.
• Complete. The update operation is ended.
The second table displays the list of the codes and of the FPGA files composing the equipment firmware.
Every row corresponds to a firmware element (code or FPGA) for which is pointed out in the column:
Unit. Name of the unit or of the equipment part where there is the controller (code) or the program-
mable device (FPGA file).
Software. Firmware name. Usually the name indicates the component type:
• FW_boot. Boot code. This part of code cannot be updated. In fact, it is not provided with a
version of the memory benches.
• FW_appl. Application code.
• Conf_... or FPGA... Configuration file of the programmable devices.
Actual Release. Version of the code or of the FPGA file present into the controller.
For some elements, the system indicates the version and also the relevant identification code composed
by the letter E or N followed by a number (each number identifies a different code type).
Release Bench 1. Firmware version present into the memory bench 1 of the controller.
Release Bench 2. Firmware version present into the memory bench 2 of the controller.
Push-button:
Upgrade. Update the firmware of the equipment.
Bench Switch. Switch the operation of the memory benches relevant to the main controller.

Related Topics
WEB LCT tab
The tab displays the characteristics of WEB LCT application present in the equipment.
Description. Application type present into the equipment (WEB LCT).
Code. Identification code of WEB LCT application present into the equipment.
Current version. WEB LCT version present into the equipment.
Push-button:
Browse. Open the window of O.S. for the selection of the file you wish to use for the update.
Upload. Update the WEB LCT application.
IP/OSI stack switch tab
WARNING Tab available only to System.
The tab displays the communication stack in use.
Current Stack. Communication stack in use:

• IP. Communication stack Full IP.
• OSI. Communication stack IP Over OSI (not available).
Push-button:
Apply. Restore Factory Default of the equipment.
Restart. Execute the equipment software reset.
Related Topics

The firmware of the equipment is the assembly of all the firmware necessary for the management of the
entire equipment (firmware of the main controller and firmware of the peripheral units).
The firmware of the equipment is present into the main controller that is provided with two memory bench-
es (bench) the first one on service and the other one in waiting status.
Each bench can contain one firmware version (also different from the other one) of the equipment.
It is possible to update the equipment sw/fw relevant to one memory bench only at a time. The application
automatically updates the firmware of the memory bench not running or not present (Bench Status pa-
rameter - Loaded or Not Loaded value).
Through the graphical interface WEB LCT, the Factory Default settings of an equipment can be restored.
At the restart or at the new switch-on of the equipment, the Factory Default configuration will be applied.
All the settings executed until then by the user will be deleted (for example, user list, remote equipment
list, etc.).
In Factory Default status, the connection to the equipment and to the link takes place by means of the
Ethernet port AUX and using the connection modality Out of Band.
In order to login to the equipment, the default user must be used. Username: SYSTEM - Password: siae-
micr.
The communication ports of the equipment will be restored to the addresses pointed out in Tab.2.
These addresses differ depending on the type (High or Low) of ODU. The equipment keeps always in mem-
ory the type (High or Low) of the last connected ODU.
Tab.2 Factory Default - ALFOplus
IF THE EQUIPMENT IS INSERTED INTO AN IP NETWORK
Parameter IP Address NetMask ODU
Ethernet port 172.20.254.14 255.255.0.0 Low

172.20.255.15 255.255.0.0 High
Default Gateway null - Low
null - High
Agent IP Address Local Ethernet address
If the user has lost the connection with the equipment because of a wrong configuration of the connection
parameters, the recovery procedure can be used (rescue connection).
At switch-on, the equipment opens a time window of 20 seconds during which it makes itself reachable on
the ports LAN 1 and LAN 2 using the rescue connection address and accepts the user login through the
correct username and password. In this modality, the port LAN 1 and LAN 2 accepts only frames without
VLAN tag.
The rescue connection IP address is: 172.20.253.13.
Once logged in, the user can configure the equipment and possible, restore the Factory Default condition.
The detection of the time window during which the rescue connection can be attempted is managed by an
external software application.

Backup/Restore Config.
The Backup/Restore Config. command manages the backup/restore from file of the whole equipment
configuration.
Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration)
Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration)
Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last operation of
configuration restore (revert configuration)
The selection of the command displays the Backup/Restore Config. contextual area
In order to deepen this topic, see Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (more info)
Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration)
1. If not already active, start the WEB LCT Console or SCT/LMT program, necessary to manage the oper-
ation of FTP for the file transfer.
2. Select Main > Backup/Restore Config.
3. Type, in the Backup file name box, the path where you wish to save the file and the name of the file
with bak extension.
It is possible to set a name already existing for the file in the chosen path. In this case, the data present
in the file will be overwritten.
4. Press Backup and confirm.
A window shows the progress of the operation.
To stop the operation, press Abort and confirm.
A message displays the result of the operation.
Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration)
3. Set, in the Restore file name box, the name of the file you wish to use to restore the configuration.
4. Press Restore and confirm.


Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the
last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration)

The Reverte parameter indicates the date/time of the backup file automatically created by the program
before the last restore operation.
The format of date/time changes according to the setting made in one’s operating system.
The wording --- indicates that the file is not available.
3. Press Revert and confirm.


Backup/Restore Config. contextual area
The contextual area contains the items to manage the backup/restore of the file of the whole equipment
configuration.
Backup file name. Type, in this box, the path and the name of the file which you wish to save the
whole equipment configuration to.
Restore file name. Type, in this box, the path and the name of the file which you wish to use for the
restore of the previously saved configuration.
Reverte. This parameter indicates the date/time of the backup file automatically created by the pro-
gram before the last restore operation. The format of date/time changes according to the setting made
in one’s operating system. The wording --- indicates that the file is not available.
Push-button:
Backup. Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration).

Restore. Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration).
Reverte. Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last op-
eration of configuration restore (revert configuration).
Related Topics
Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (more info)

Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (more info)
The WEB LCT program allows Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration). The saved
file is in binary format and can be saved on PC or external support according to the user needs.
Then, in any moment, the user can restore the equipment configuration saved to file transferring the data
of the file to the same equipment (configuration restore - Transfer the equipment configuration previously
saved (restore configuration)).
Before restoring the configuration, the equipment saves its own current configuration and keeps it available
until the successive restore operation.
In any moment, the user can Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program
before the last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration).
In this way, two backup versions will be always available for an equipment: one executed by the user and
the other automatically executed by the program before the last restore operation.

Alarm Severity Config.
The Alarm Severity Config. command manages the alarm transmission and their severity level.
Verify the severity level and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms
Enable/disable an alarm
Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm
Change the severity level of an alarm
The selection of the command displays the Alarm Severity Config. contextual area
In order to deepen this topic, see Enabling/forwarding/severity of an alarm (more info)
Verify the severity level and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms
1. Select Main > Alarm Severity Config.

The Alarm Severity Config. contextual area displays the alarms configuration.
Enable/disable an alarm
2. Select the alarm and press Edit Alarm Config or double click on the alarm.
3. Set the Severity parameter, selecting:
• Disable, to disable the alarm.
• Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical to enable the alarm. Select the option relevant to the
severity level to be assigned to the alarm
4. Press Ok.
The settings are reported in the Alarm Severity Config. contextual area. The symbol [*] is displayed
next to the name of the changed alarm.
Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm
WARNING The forwarding status of the trap can be changed only if the alarm is enabled (see Enable/disable
an alarm).
3. Set the Trap parameter, selecting:

• Enable, to enable the forwarding of the alarm trap to the management system.
• Disable, to disable the forwarding of the alarm trap to a possible management system external
to the equipment (for example SCT/LMT and/or NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX).
4. Press Ok.
3. Set the Severity parameter, selecting the severity you wish to associate to the alarm: Status, Warning,
Minor, Major or Critical.
If the alarm was disabled (Disable option selected), the selection of a different option, besides modify-
ing the alarm severity level, automatically enables it.
4. Press Ok.

Alarm Severity Config. contextual area
The contextual area displays the alarms configuration.
Alarms are subdivided into groups.

When contextual area is opened, only the groups are displayed (Group/Alarm column).
To expand and compress the list of alarms associated to a group, select the symbol next to the name
of the group. Every selection of the symbol makes the list assumes the status complementary to the pre-
vious one (if compress it becomes expanded and vice versa).
The groups and the alarms change according to the equipment configuration.
When a group is expanded, for every alarm is pointed out in the column:
Group/Alarm. Alarm name.
A coloured box is before the name, pointing out the alarm status and severity:
• White box with red X. Alarm disabled.
• Green box. Alarm enabled with severity equivalent to a status signal.
• Light blue box. Alarm enabled with Warning severity.
• Yellow box. Alarm enabled with Minor severity.
• Orange box. Alarm enabled with Major severity.
• Red box. Alarm enabled with Critical severity.
The presence of an asterisk [*] between the box and the alarm name indicates that at least one char-
acteristic of the alarm has been changed.
Severity. Enabling status of the alarm and, if enabled, relevant severity level:
• Disabled. Alarm disabled.
• Status. Alarm enabled with severity equivalent to a status signal.
• Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. Alarm enabled with severity respectively Status, Warning,
Minor, Major or Critical.
• Not available in this SW version. Alarm not supported by the current firmware version pre-
sent into the equipment controller.
Trap Notification. Forwarding status of the trap:

• Enabled. The transmission of the alarm trap to the management system is enabled.
• Disabled. The transmission of the alarm trap to a possible external management system is
disabled (for example SCT/LMT and/or NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX).
• ---. Information not meaningful because the alarm is disabled.
Push-button:
Edit Alarm Config. Enable/disable an alarm, Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm or
Related Topics
Enabling/forwarding/severity of an alarm (more info)

Enabling/forwarding/severity of an alarm (more info)
WARNING The enabling/disabling of the alarm and of the forwarding of the trap is independent for each
alarm and local to the equipment which the operation is executed for. This means that the setting must be
executed for each single alarm of each single equipment.
Enabling/disabling the alarms
The term alarm means the fault signal generated by an error or by a wrong operation of the equipment or
of any element that compose it.
The equipment alarms can be disabled and re-enabled by the user according to the needs.
Disabling an alarm means that, on the detection of the alarm itself, this is not registered in the equipment
controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program: as the alarm
had never occurred.
On the contrary, enabling an alarm (default condition) means that, when the alarm is detected, this is reg-
istered in the equipment controller and, if the forwarding of the relevant trap is enabled (see next item),
the alarm is communicated to the management system and displayed in the current alarms and the history
alarms.
Enabling/disabling the forwarding of the alarm traps
The trap is a message (in this case of detection or clearing of an alarm) spontaneously sent by the equip-
ment to a possible external management system, for example SCT/LMT and/or NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/
NMS5LX.
The forwarding of the trap of each alarm can be disabled and re-enabled by the user according to his own
needs.
Disabling a trap means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is not registered in the equipment controller
and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program.
On the contrary, enabling a trap (default condition) means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is reg-
istered in the equipment controller and communicated to the management system, which displays it in the
current alarms and the history alarms.
Alarm severity
Each alarm acknowledged and managed by the management program has an associated severity level
which determinates the importance of the alarm.
This severity is not fixed, but can be changed by the user as he likes.

User Manager
The User Manager command manages the list of the equipment users.
Verify the user list
Add a user to the list
Modify a user into the list
Delete a user from the list
Change the password and the timeout of the System user
Change the network password and timeout
Change the password and the timeout of NMS5UX user
Verify/modify the IP address of Permanent Login
The selection of the command displays the User Manager contextual area
In order to deepen this topic, see User list (more info)
Verify the user list
1. Select Main > User Manager.

The User Manager contextual area displays the user list currently stored in the equipment is displayed.
Add a user to the list
WARNING For every list, a maximum of 4 users can be defined for every profile (totally up to 12 users).
2. Select Add.
3. In the User box, type the user name (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to 8).
The same name cannot be assigned to two different users present in the same list. Then, when the user
name has been assigned, it cannot be changed later.
4. Into the Password box, type the access code of the (alphanumeric string with a number of characters
from 1 up to 8).
5. Into the Confirm Password box, type newly the access code of the user.
6. Into the User Profile box, set the profile to be assigned to the user:
• Read Only. The user with this profile can check the parameters but it can not forward commands
or execute changing to the equipment configuration.
• Read & Write. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only maintenance
operations (MAN OP).
• Station Op. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or execute
changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying the user
list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the logout of an user and all those operations
available only to the System user (or NMS5UX).
It is not possible to create a user with System profile.
7. Set the timeout of the WEB LCT session opened by the user. In detail, if you wish:

• The session of WEB LCT opened by the user (even if disconnected) is kept for an undefined pe-
riod (session timeout disabled), deactivate the box Login Timeout.
• The session of WEB LCT opened by the user, if disconnected, is automatically terminated once
reached a specific time limit (session timeout disabled), activate the box Login Timeout and type
a value between 1 and 43200 sec. (12h) in the box User Keep Alive (Sec.).
With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session whose relevant WEB LCT has been
closed but for which the disconnection from the equipment has not been executed (user logout).

The new user is inserted in the list and communicated to the equipment.
Modify a user into the list
2. Select the user and press Modify or double click on the user.
3. Execute the changing.

The setting modes of the parameters are the same ones above pointed out into the par. Add a user to
the list.
Each time even a single parameter is changed, the access code (parameter Password, Confirm pass-
word) must be inserted.
The user name (parameter User) cannot be modified.
Delete a user from the list

2. Select the user.
Change the password and the timeout of the System user
WARNING If you wish to change only the timeout, it is necessary to input the current password of the Sys-
tem user in the Password and Confirm Password fields.

2. Press System.
3. To change the password:
a. Into the Password box, type the new access code of System user (alphanumeric string with a
number of characters from 1 up to 8).
b. Into the Confirm Password box, type newly the access code.
4. To change the timeout of the WEB LCT session opened by System user:
• Disable the Login Timeout box. The WEB LCT session opened by the System user (even if dis-
connected) will be kept for an indefinite period of time (session timeout disabled).
• Enable the Login Timeout box. The WEB LCT session opened by the System user, if disconnect-
ed, will be automatically ended once reached the set time limit (Session timeout enabled).

To set time limit type, in the User Keep Alive (Sec.) box, a value between 1 and 43200 sec.
(12h).
With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session whose relevant WEB LCT has been closed but
for which the disconnection from the equipment has not been executed (user logout).
Change the network password and timeout
WARNING If you wish to change only the timeout, it is necessary to input the current network password in
the Password and Confirm Password fields.
2. Press Network.
a. Into the Password box, type the new network password (alphanumeric string with a number of
characters from 1 up to 8).
b. Into the Confirm Password box, type newly the new network password.
4. To change the timeout of the WEB LCT session of the remote equipment:
• Disable the Login Timeout box. The WEB LCT session of the remote equipment (even if discon-
nected) will be kept for an indefinite period of time (session timeout disabled).
• Enable the Login Timeout box. The WEB LCT session of the remote equipment, if disconnected,
will be automatically ended once reached the set time limit (Session timeout enabled).
(12h).
Change the password and the timeout of NMS5UX user
WARNING The change of NMS5UX user (CEM password) has to be executed only if the default password
used by the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system is changed.
If you wish to change only the timeout, it is necessary to type the current NMS5UX user password into the
Password and Confirm Password fields.
2. Press CEM.
a. Into the Password box, type the new NMS5UX user password (alphanumeric string with a num-
ber of characters from 1 up to 8).
b. Into the Confirm Password box, type newly the access code.
4. To change the timeout of the WEB LCT session opened by NMS5UX user:
• Disable the Login Timeout box. The WEB LCT session opened by the NMS5UX user (even if dis-
connected) will be kept for an indefinite period of time (session timeout disabled).
• Enable the Login Timeout box. The WEB LCT session opened by the NMS5UX user, if disconnect-
ed, will be automatically ended once reached the set time limit (Session timeout enabled).
(12h).

Verify/modify the IP address of Permanent Login
WARNING The remote user has the same characteristics of the NMS5UX user with the only exception that
he does not need for a login password.
A maximum of 2 remote users can be set.
2. Press Permanent Login.

The box:
• Manager IP Address 1 indicates the IP address of the machine relevant the first remote user.
• Manager IP Address 2 indicates the IP address of the machine relevant the second remote user.
Value 0.0.0.0 indicates the parameter is disabled.
The setting of the box Trap Version 2 present below every box indicates the version (SNMP) used for
the trap sending. In detail, if the box is:
• Active. For the specific remote user, the sending of trap in version 2 is enabled.
• Inactive. For the specific remote user, the sending of trap in version 1 is enabled.
3. To change the IP address of the machine relevant the first remote user, type a valid IP address in the
Manager IP Address 1 box.
4. To change the IP address of the machine relevant the second remote user, type a valid IP address in
the Manager IP Address 2 box.
5. Activate the Trap Version 2 option, under the relevant Manager IP Address… box, to set the trap man-
agement of version 2 (SNMP).
If the option is not activated, the version 1 (SNMP) of the traps is used.

User Manager contextual area
The table, present in the contextual area, displays the user list currently stored in the equipment is dis-
played.
Every row of the table corresponds to one user. For every user, is pointed out in the column:
User name. User name.
Profile. User profile:

• Read Only. The user with this profile can check the parameters but it can not forward com-
mands or execute changing to the equipment configuration.
• Read & Write. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only mainte-
nance operations (MAN OP).
• Station Op. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or
execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modi-
fying the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the logout of an user and
all those operations available only to the System user (or NMS5UX).
User Keep Alive. Timeout of WEB LCT session opened by the user:
• No Timeout. Session timeout disabled. WEB LCT session opened by the user (even if discon-
nected) will be kept for an indefinite period of time.
• <number> Seconds. Session timeout enabled. WEB LCT session opened by the user, if dis-
connected, will be automatically ended once reached the set time limit.
With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session whose relevant WEB LCT page has been closed
but for which the disconnection from the equipment has not been executed (user logout).
The System and NMS5UX users are not pointed out into the list.
Push-button:
Add. Add a user to the list.

Modify. Modify a user into the list.
Remove. Delete a user from the list
System. Change the password and the timeout of the System user.
Network. Change the network password and timeout.
CEM. Change the password and the timeout of NMS5UX user
Permanent Login. Verify/modify the IP address of Permanent Login
Related Topics
User list (more info)

User list (more info)
The users list is a list of users that can be connected and ask for the login to the equipment.
If a user is not present in the users list memorized in the equipment controller, this user will not be able
to connect and/or to execute the login to that equipment.
Each equipment, that can be managed by the WEB LCT or SCT/LMT application, is equipped with two preset
users:
• SYSTEM. User of WEB LCT application or SCT/LMT program with the following features:
• User name: System (unchangeable parameter).
• Timeout: No Timeout (changeable parameter).
• Profile: System (unchangeable parameter).
• Password: Siaemicr (default) (changeable parameter - see Change the password and the
timeout of the System user).
The System user is single one for every equipment and he can not be deleted.
Only this user has the possibility to create, modify and delete users in the user list.
The user with System profile can as to check the parameters (reading operation) as to forward
commands or to execute changing (writing operation) to the equipment configuration.
• NMS5UX. User of the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system, with the following features:
• User name: NMS5UX (unchangeable parameter).
• Timeout: No Timeout (changeable parameter).
• Profile: System (unchangeable parameter).
• Password: Predefined (changeable parameter - see Change the password and the time-
out of NMS5UX user).
The NMS5UX user can not be deleted.

This user has the possibility to create, modify and delete users in the user list of the equipment
by means of the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX graphic interface. More information about the
NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system is reported in the relevant documentation.
The user with System profile can as to check the parameters (reading operation) as to forward
commands or to execute changing (writing operation) to the equipment configuration.
In every user list, up to 12 different users can be created besides the predefined users (see Add a user to
the list); the user configuration can be modified (see Modify a user into the list) and deleted (see Delete a
user from the list).
All the users of the users list relevant to an equipment (with the exception of the System and NMS5UX),
have to be set by the WEB LCT application, the SCT/LMT program or NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system.

EQUIPMENT
BW & Mod./Link ID. It manages the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, adaptive modulation
and link identification number.
General Preset. It manages the modem and radio parameters.

BW & Mod./Link ID
The BW & Mod./Link ID command manages the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, to adaptive
modulation and the link identification number.
Verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters of the
adaptive modulation
Modify the reference band/modulation
Modify the operating status of adaptive modulation
Modify the power profile of the RF transmitter (ACM enabled)
Modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled)
Verify/modify the link identification number
The selection of the command displays the BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area.
In order to deepen this topic, see Adaptive modulation (more info)
Verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration
parameters of the adaptive modulation
1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.

The Modulation & Capacity tab displays the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the
configuration parameters of the adaptive modulation.

The Bandwidth & Modulation parameter indicates the current reference band/modulation. For each one
of the radio channelling, the modulation and the consequent capacity can be configured.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished value.

If the message Operation Fail! Wrong value assigned is displayed, the relevant Upgrade up to... func-
tionality is not enabled for the equipment (see Verify the functionalities enabled for the equipment).

The ACM Engine parameter indicates the operating status of the adaptive modulation.
2. To change the parameter, select the option:

• Disabled. Adaptive modulation disabled.
• enab. - max. throug. Adaptive modulation enabled.

WARNING Operation available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.

The profile is used only if a modulation equal to the minimum modulation has been selected as reference.

The Tx Power Ramp Up To... parameter indicates the power profile of the RF transmitter.
2. To change the parameter, select the value:

• Disabled. Mean power constant when the modulation changes.
• Enabled. Mean power constant from the minimum modulation to the reference modulation. Pow-
er equal or decreasing up to the maximum modulation.
WARNING Operation available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.

The Upper Modulation and Lower Modulation parameters respectively indicates the upper threshold and
the lower threshold of the modulation.
2. To change the parameters Upper Modulation and Lower Modulation, select the value relevant to the
wished modulation.
2. Select the Local Link ID tab.

The Local Link ID parameter indicates the link identification number.
3. To change the parameter, type the new value in the box (value between 1 and 255).
Setting the value 0 corresponds to not selecting the identification number.
The setting so executed does NOT automatically modify also the identification number of the remote
equipment.

BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area
In the BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area is present the:

Modulation & Capacity tab. The tab displays the reference band/modulation, the operating status and
the configuration parameters of the adaptive modulation.
Local Link ID tab. The tab displays the link identification number.
Push-button:
Modulation & Capacity tab
The tab displays the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters of
the adaptive modulation:
ACM Engine. Operating status of the adaptive modulation:

• enab. - max. throug. The adaptive modulation is enabled.
• Disabled. The adaptive modulation is disabled.
Bandwidth & Modulation. Channelling - Modulation. For each one of the radio channelling, the mod-
ulation and the consequent capacity can be configured.
Lower Modulation, Upper Modulation. Respectively upper and lower thresholds of the Tx modula-
tion.
Parameter available and meaningful only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.
Tx Power Ramp Up To.... Power profile of the RF transmitter:
• Disabled. Mean power constant when the modulation changes.
• Enabled. Mean power constant from the minimum modulation to the reference modulation.
Power equal or decreasing up to the maximum modulation.
Parameter available and meaningful only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.
ACM Table. This table shows, for each ACM level, the capacity used by Ethernet tributaries.
Depending on the operating status of the adaptive modulation, one or more profile will be available. In
detail, if the adaptive modulation is:
• Disabled. The table contains only the ACM profile relevant to the reference modulation
(Bandwidth & Modulation).
• Enabled. The table contains all the ACM profiles. Among these, the profile included between
the minimum and the maximum modulation are available.
Active Modulation (ACM Table). A total of 11 ACM modulations are available from 4QAM to 1024QAM,
among which there are two modulations with low rate FEC (4QAM Strong, 16QAM Strong).
Ethernet Capacity (ACM Table). Capacity used by the Ethernet tributaries.
When the window is opened, the values present in the tab refer to the currently selected reference band/
modulation.
If the currently selected reference band/modulation is modified, some parameters are disabled.
In order to display the parameters relevant to the new selected band, the new reference band/modulation
must be confirmed (push-button Apply).
Related Topics

Adaptive modulation (more info)
Local Link ID tab
The tab displays the link identification number.
Local Link ID. Link identification number.
Related Topics

Adaptive modulation (more info)
Ethernet transport
ALFOplus equipment assigns all the available traffic capacity to Ethernet interface.
Multiple ACM profiles per modulation
When more than one ACM profile (different FEC redundancy) is available at the selected reference modu-
lation (i.e.: 4 QAM and 4 QAM strong), the maximum throughput profile will be automatically selected (i.e.:
4 QAM).
When more than one ACM profile (different FEC redundancy) is available at the selected lower modulation
(i.e.: 4 QAM and 4 QAM strong), the minimum throughput profile will be automatically included (i.e.: 4
QAM strong).
When more than one ACM profile (different FEC redundancy) is available at the selected upper modulation
(i.e.: 4 QAM and 4 QAM strong), the maximum throughput profile will be automatically included (i.e.: 4
QAM).
Reference modulation and power profile of the transmitter
The choice of the reference modulation and of the power profile depends on the license type owned by the
network operator.
The reference modulation determines the emission spectrum to be in compliance with the current laws.
The power profile increasing when the modulation decreases can be enabled according to the standard
ETSI EN 302 217-2-2: the power as function of the modulation can be only lower then or equal to the power
of the reference modulation.
More information is reported in the equipment manual ALFOplus.

General Preset
The General Preset command manages the modem and radio parameters.
Verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception
Verify/modify the radio branch label
Verify/modify the generation of the antenna aiming signal
The selection of the command displays the General Preset contextual area
1. Select Equipment > General Preset.

The Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold: <current value> dBm parameter indicates the threshold level of
the signal at reception. Under this threshold level, the relevant alarm is activated.
2. To change the parameter, move the cursor to the wished level.

The Radio Branch Label parameter indicates the label that identifies the radio branch.
2. To change the parameter, type the new label (alphanumeric string with maximum 30 characters).

The RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication) parameter indicates the enabling state of the genera-
tion of the antenna aiming.
• Enable. The function is enabled.
• Disable. The function is disabled.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Execute the equipment software reset.

General Preset contextual area
The General Preset... contextual area shows the modem and radio parameters.
Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the signal at reception.
Radio Branch Label. Label that identifies the radio branch.
RSSI. Enabling state of the generation of the antenna aiming:

• Enable. The function is enabled (default configuration).
• Disable. The function is disabled.
Push-button:
Related Topics

SYNCHRONISATION
The Synchronisation command manages the sources and the outputs of synchronism
Verify/modify the management of synchronisation
Manage the T0 synchronism:
Verify the status and configuration of the T0 synchronism
Force the status of T0 synchronisation
Set the Hold Off Time parameter
Set the WTR Time parameter
Set the threshold levels of LTI alarm
Enable/disable the use of the source quality as criterion for the synchronism selection
Manage the synchronism sources:
Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source
Modify the use priority of a synchronism source
Force the use of a synchronism source
Set a synchronism source as preferential
Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source
Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without waiting for
the expiry of Wait Time
sources
Verify/modify the management of SSM protocol for every single LAN
The selection of the command displays the Synchronisation contextual area
In order to deepen this topic, see Management of synchronisation (more info)
Verify/modify the management of synchronisation

1. Select Synchronisation.
The Synchronisation parameter indicates the management of synchronisation:
• Enabled box unchecked. Synchronisation disabled.
• Enabled box checked ( ). Synchronisation enabled.
2. To change the parameter, check/uncheck the box.
Verify the status and configuration of the T0 synchronism

The General tab displays the configuration parameters and the alarms status of the T0 synchronism.

User Profile | Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).
The Status Control parameter indicates the status of T0 synchronism:
• Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is generated by the equip-
ment internal reference - Internal Source).
• Hold Over. The status of Hold Over is forced.
• Locked. The synchronism is locked to an external source.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are activating the forcing (selection of the Free Running or Hold Over option) a message
warns that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
The activation of the forcing activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting.

The Hold Off Time parameter indicates the time (expressed in ms) during which the system keeps the
evaluated frequency of an invalid synchronism source (absent or degraded).
At the end of the Hold Off time, the invalid source will be rejected and it will be used the first input
source having a valid signal.
2. To change the parameter, set in the box a value between 300 and 1800 msec.
3. Press Apply.

The WTR Time parameter indicates the time (expressed in minutes) that has to pass in such a way to
allow to the selected input source having a valid signal to be really used within the process for the se-
lection of T0 synchronism.
2. To change the parameter, set in the box a value between 0 and 12 minutes.
3. Press Apply.

The LTI Set Time and LTI Reset Time parameters indicate the threshold level of LTI alarm (Timing Synk
Loss Alarm). In detail:

• LTI Set Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds with the presence
of the LTI alarm - over which the system activates the alarm itself.
• LTI Reset Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds without the
presence of the LTI alarm - over which the system deactivates the alarm itself.
2. To change the parameter, set the new values in the specific boxes (allowed interval between 0 and 60
seconds).
3. Press Apply.
Enable/disable the use of the source quality as criterion for the synchronism
selection
The parameter Enabled indicates the status of use of the source quality level as criterion for the syn-
chronism selection.
Active box ( ) means the use is enabled; inactive box means the use is disabled.
If the Enabled parameter is not available, this means that the SSM G8264 (quality sync) functionality
is not enabled for the equipment (see Verify the functionalities enabled for the equipment).
2. To change the parameter, check or uncheck the relevant box.


2. Select the T0 tab.

The Priority column shows the usage status of each single source.
3. To enable the use of a source, select the specific Priority box and then a number between 1 and 9 ac-
cording to the desired priority level to be assigned to the source (1: maximum priority, 9: minimum
priority).
To disable the use of the source, select the specific Priority box and then the Dis. value.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

WARNING Operation available and meaningful only when the use of the synchronism source is active.

The Priority column shows the priority level of each single source.
3. To change the priority level of a source, select the specific Priority box and then a number between 1
and 9 according to the desired priority level to be assigned to the source (1: maximum priority, 9: min-
imum priority).



Operation meaningful only when the use of the synchronism source is active.

The Forced Switch column shows the forcing status of each single source.
3. To change the forcing status of a source, select the specific Forced Switch box and then the option:
• Off, not to force the use of the source for the generation of the synchronism.
• On, to force the use of the source for the generation of the synchronism.
4. Press Apply changes.

Only if you are activating the forcing a message warns that you are executing a forcing and displays
the current setting of timeout.

The activation of the forcing activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting.

WARNING Operation meaningful only when the use of the synchronism source is active.

The Preferential Switch column shows if the source is used as preferential.
3. To change the preferential status of a source, select the specific Preferential Switch box and then the
option:
• Off. The synchronism source is not preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism
sources.
• On. The synchronism source is preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism sourc-
es and (in absence of alarms causing its degrade or forced sources) is used for the generation
of the synchronism.

WARNING Operation available only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the selection of the synchro-
nism, is enabled.

For every synchronism source, the parameter Ovw Rx Qlty indicates the forcing status of the quality
level in reception; while the parameter Ovw Tx Qlty indicates the forcing status of the quality level in
transmission.
3. To change the parameters, select the Ovw Rx Qlty or Ovw Tx Qlty box and than the option:
• none. The quality of the synchronism source is not forced. The quality is that taken from the
SSM protocol or, for the sources that do not use the SSM protocol (T2/T3 1 and T2/T3 2 sourc-
es), the default one (SEC).
• PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the param-
eters of the primary reference clock.
• SSUT. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the pa-
rameters of the transit synchronism units.
• SSUL. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the pa-
rameters of the local synchronism units.
• SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the param-
eters of the equipment clock.
• DNU. The source has not to be used for the synchronization.
Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism

without waiting for the expiry of Wait Time
WARNING Operation meaningful only when the use of the synchronism source is active.
3. Select the source, with valid signal, whose availability you wish to restore for the generation of T0 syn-
chronism.
4. Press WTR Clear and confirm.

The source is immediately used for the generation of T0 synchronism. The period Wtr Time is consid-
ered elapsed.
Verify/modify the modality to assign the role of the LAN ports (1000Base-T)
used as synchronism sources
WARNING Operation available only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism,
is enabled.
Operation available only for LAN ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active and
the active configuration is 1000Base-T.
2. Select the 1000Base-T Role tab.

The TE LAN-1 and TE LAN-2 boxes respectively point out the modality used to assign the role (Master
or Slave) of the LANs set for the synchronism sources TE LAN-1 and TE LAN-B2:
• According to synch direction. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism is
automatically managed by SSM protocol independently from the port parameter.

• As set up for source LAN. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism is de-
fined at level of LAN (see Verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) for
the LAN).
3. To change the parameter, select the wished value in the box.

If the message Operation Fail! Wrong value assigned is displayed, the SyncE & G.8264 functionality is
not enabled for the equipment (see Verify the functionalities enabled for the equipment).

WARNING Operation meaningful only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchro-
nism, is enabled.
2. Select the LAN SSM Enabling tab.

The parameters LAN 1 and LAN 2 respectively point out the enabling status of the management of the
SSM messages for the ports LAN 1 and LAN 2.
The active box ( ) indicates that the SSM messages are managed by the LAN, the inactive box indicates
that the messages are not managed.
3. To change a parameter, check or uncheck the relevant box.

Synchronisation contextual area

General tab. The tab displays the configuration parameters and the alarms status of T0 synchronism.
T0 tab. The tabs display the configuration parameters and the status of the synchronism sources.
1000Base-T Role tab. The tabs display the role of the LAN ports of the equipment in the management
of synchronism.
LAN SSM Enabling tab The tab displays the enabling status of the SSM messages for every single LAN.
Push-button:
Related Topics
Management of synchronisation (more info)
General tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters and the alarms status of T0 synchronism.
Alarms area. Alarms status of the T0 synchronism (Free Running, Hold Over and T0 boxes). The colour
of each box displays the status of the specific alarm:
Synchronisation (Settings area). Management of synchronisation. Enabled box:
• Unchecked. Synchronisation disabled.
• Checked ( ). Synchronisation enabled.
Status Control (Settings area). Status of T0 synchronism:
• Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is generated by the
equipment internal reference - Internal Source).
Hold Off Time (area Time). Time (expressed in ms) during which the system keeps the evaluated fre-
quency of an invalid synchronism source (absent or degraded). At the end of the Hold Off time, the
invalid source will be rejected and it will be used the first input source having a valid signal.
WTR Time (area Time). Time (expressed in minutes) that has to pass in such a way to allow to the
selected input source having a valid signal to be really used within the process for the selection of T0
synchronism.
LTI Set Time / LTI Reset Time (area Time). Threshold level of LTI alarm (TimingSynkLossAlarm). In
detail:
• LTI Set Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds with the pres-
ence of the LTI alarm - over which the system activates the alarm itself.
• LTI Reset Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds without the
presence of the LTI alarm - over which the system deactivates the alarm itself.
Current (Quality area). Current quality level of the T0 synchronism:

• UNK. The quality level is unavailable or unknown.
• PRC. The quality of the T0 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that
defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.

• SSUT. The quality of the T0 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that
defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.
• SSUL. The quality of the T0 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that
defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.
• SEC. The quality of the T0 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that
defines the parameters of the equipment clock.
Generally, the quality of the T0 synchronism corresponds to the quality of the synchronism which T0 is
derived from.
The parameter Current is meaningful only if the use of the quality as criterion for the synchronism se-
lection is enabled.
Enabled (Quality area). Status of use of source quality level as synchronism selection criterion.
Active box ( ) means the source quality level is used as synchronism selection criterion; inactive box
means the quality level is used as selection criterion.
If the Quality area is not available, this means that the SSM G8264 (quality sync) functionality is not en-
abled for the equipment (see Verify the functionalities enabled for the equipment).
Related Topics
T0 tab
The tabs display the configuration parameters and the status of the synchronism sources.
The table present in the specific tab displays the sources for T0 synchronism. Every table row corresponds
to one source, for which is pointed out in the column:
Name. Synchronism source name:

• TE LAN-1. Source extracted from the LAN 1 of Ethernet Switch (electrical or optical inter-
face).
• TE LAN-2. Source extracted from the LAN 2 of Ethernet Switch (electrical interface).
• T2 Radio. Source extracted from the Radio 1A.
• Internal. Source extracted from an its own internal reference (12,8MHz STRATUM 3). The
Internal source has not configuration parameters.
If the TE LAN-1 and TE LAN-2 sources are not available, this means that the SyncE & G.8264 function-
ality is not enabled for the equipment (see Verify the functionalities enabled for the equipment).
Priority. Status and priority use of the source:

• Dis. The synchronism source is not used.
• <1 ÷ 9>. The synchronism source is enabled and has a priority level pointed out by the num-
ber (1: maximum priority, 9: minimum priority).
Forced Switch. Forced use of the source:

• Off. The source has not been manually forced for the generation of T0 synchronism.
• On <light blue box>. The source has been manually forced for the generation of T0 synchro-
nism (Manual Operation).
Preferential Switch. Status of preferential usage of the source:
• Off. The synchronism source is not preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism
sources.
• On. The synchronism source is preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism
sources and (in absence of alarms causing its degrade or forced sources) is used for the gen-
eration of the synchronism.

Sync Loss / Sync Drift. Respectively status of the alarm Timing Synk Loss Alarm and Timing Synk
Drift Alarm relevant to the source. The colour of each box displays the status of the specific alarm:
Rx Quality. Quality level in reception of the source:

• PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the pa-
rameters of the primary reference clock.
• SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the pa-
rameters of the equipment clock.
• UNK. The quality level is unavailable or unknown.
Tx Quality. Quality level in transmission of the source.
The quality level in transmission of the synchronism source in input is the result of the protocol calcu-
lation.
The displayed values are the same described for the Rx Quality parameter.
Ovw Rx Qlty. Forcing status of the quality level in reception of the source:
• PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the pa-
rameters of the primary reference clock.
• SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the pa-
rameters of the equipment clock.
• UNK. The quality level is unavailable or unknown
• none. The quality of the synchronism source is not forced. The quality is that taken from the
SSM protocol or, for the sources that do not use the SSM protocol (T2/T3 1 and T2/T3 2
sources), the default one (SEC).
Ovw Tx Qlty. Forcing status of the quality level in transmission of the source.
The displayed values are the same described for the Ovw Rx Qlty parameter.
The Rx Quality, Tx Quality, Ovw Rx Qlty and Ovw Tx Qlty parameters are present only if the use of the
quality, as criterion for the selection of the synchronism, is enabled.
The source of synchronism whose row has red border indicates the source which the equipment extracts
the synchronization T0 from.
When the source, which the synchronization is extracted from, changes, the row relevant to the new source
will become yellow and will blink before taking the red border.
Push-button:
Apply changes. Confirm the changes.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes not confirmed yet.
WTR Clear. Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without waiting
for the expiry of Wait Time.
Related Topics

1000Base-T Role tab
WARNING Operation available only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism,
is enabled.
The tab displays the parameters for the management of the sources TE LAN-1 and TE LAN-2:
TE LAN-A, TE LAN-B. Respectively modality to assign the role (Master or Slave) of the LANs with elec-
trical interface (1000Base-T) set for the synchronism sources TE LAN-A and TE LAN-B:
• According to synch direction. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism
is automatically managed by SSM protocol independently from the port parameter.
• As set up for source LAN. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism is
defined at level of LAN (see Verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism
(role) for the LAN).
Related Topics
sources
LAN SSM Enabling tab
The tab displays the enabling status of the SSM messages:

LAN 1, LAN 2. Respectively enabling status of the management of the SSM messages for the ports
LAN 1 and LAN 2.
The active box ( ) indicates that the SSM messages are managed by the LAN, the inactive box indicates
that the messages are not managed.
Related Topics

Management of synchronisation (more info)
ALFOplus equipment can be configured to operate with synchronisation enabled or disabled.

When the synchronisation is disable, the synchronisation is not managed: the clocks are generated by the
local internal reference.
When the synchronisation is enabled, the synchronism source, enabled with the highest priority, is used
to synchronise the equipment (if a forcing or a preferential is not active).
If the quality is active as criterion for the selection of the synchronism, the enabled source with highest
quality is used to synchronize the equipment (if no forcing is active).
The user can enable or disable the management of synchronisation as he wishes (see Synchronisation)and
enable/disable the use of the source quality as criterion to select the synchronism.
Here below the following topics are described:

Synchronism sources
Enabling of the synchronism sources
Priority of the synchronism source
Quality of synchronism source
Forcing of a synchronism source
Function of preferential synchronism source
Internal synchronism T0
Synchronism sources
The equipment has more synchronism sources.

TE LAN-1. Source extracted from the LAN 1 of Ethernet Switch (electrical or optical interface).
TE LAN-2. Source extracted from the LAN 2 of Ethernet Switch (electrical interface).
T2 Radio. Source extracted from the Radio 1A.
Internal. Source extracted from an its own internal reference (12,8MHz STRATUM 3).
WARNING If the TE LAN-1 and TE LAN-2 sources are not available, this means that the SyncE & G.8264
functionality is not enabled for the equipment (see Verify the functionalities enabled for the equipment).
Enabling of the synchronism sources
A synchronism source, in order to be used, must be enabled by the user (see Enable/disable the use of a
synchronism source).
Priority of the synchronism source
A priority level can be associated to every synchronism source (see Modify the use priority of a synchronism
source).
When the quality is not active as criterion for the selection of the synchronism, the source with the highest
priority level and whose signal is valid, is used to synchronize the equipment (if a forcing or a preferential
source is not active).
The priority level of the synchronism source is pointed out by a number between 1 and 9, where 1 indicates
the highest priority and 9 the lowest one.
Generally the equipment takes the synchronism from the source with the highest priority level: if this
source is missing or is degraded, the synchronism is taken from the source with priority level immediately
lower.

When the source with highest priority level returns to be valid, the equipment after the WTR time will au-
tomatically start to use it to take the synchronism. If all the synchronism sources (set by the user) become
unavailable, the equipment automatically takes the synchronism from its own internal reference.
The degradation of the signal is caused by the presence of, at least, one of the following conditions:
• The source is not physically present.
• The difference between the source frequency and the internal reference source (STRATUM 3) is
greater than ± 7 ppm.
If two or more sources with the same priority are activated, these sources will be inserted into a circular
and not Revertive list.
Quality of synchronism source
Every synchronism source is characterized by a quality level.

Through WEB LCT page, it is possible Enable/disable the use of the source quality as criterion for the syn-
chronism selection.
When the use of quality is enabled, it concurs in the selection of the source to use for the synchronisation
in the following way: the source with higher quality level, and whose signal is valid, is used to synchronize
the equipment (if a forcing is not active).
The source quality level is given by the synchronisation status messages (SSM - Synchronisation Status
Message).
The availability quality levels, from higher to lower level, are listed here below:
• PRC (Primary Reference Clock). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-T G.781 with
extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the primary reference
clock.
• SSUT (Synchronisation Supply Unit Transit). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-
T G.781 with extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the
transit synchronism units.
• SSUL (Synchronisation Supply Unit Local). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-T
G.781 with extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the syn-
chronism local units.
• SEC (SDH Equipment Clock). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-T G.781 with
extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the equipment clock.
The management of the SSM messages can be enabled for every single LAN port.
This setting affects the transmission and the reception of the SSM messages as displayed here below.
SSM messages Quality management in input Quality management in output

management (Rx) (Tx)
Enable Quality value (SSM) is extracted from Quality value of T0 is inserted in the transmitted
the received packet packet (value equivalent to DNU if T0 is derived
from the considered tributary)
Disable Quality value is DNU SSM messages are not transmitted
As regards the quality management via the WEB LCT page, it is possible:
sources
WARNING The quality of the synchronism sources is a feature subjected to enabling (SSM G8264 (quality
sync) equipment feature).
If this feature is not enabled, all the parameters relevant to the quality management will not be available
(see Verify the functionalities enabled for the equipment).

Forcing of a synchronism source
This function foresees the user can force the selection of one synchronism source (see Force the use of a
synchronism source).
This forcing is made without considering the status, the quality level and the priority of the source.
This function must not be used for the normal operation of the synchronism. It is a maintenance operation
and remains active until the user disables it or the Timeout period of the manual operations expires (if set).
Function of preferential synchronism source
This function foresees the choice of a source to use as preferential among those enabled (see Set a syn-
chronism source as preferential).
When the function of preferential source is not active, the internal synchronism is taken from the enabled
source with highest quality level or highest priority (if the quality is not active).
When the function of preferential source is activated for a source, this source will be used (in absence of
alarms causing its degradation or forced sources) to take the internal synchronism independently from its
priority level.
This condition is maintained until when the user disables the function of preferential source or the source
signal becomes degraded.
This applies only if the quality is not enabled as criterion for the selection of the synchronism.
Internal synchronism T0
The synchronism source, which the internal synchronism T0 is extracted from, is determined by the SETS
of the equipment according to the following order of criteria:
• Status of the source (enabled/disabled)
• Forcing of the source
• Status of the signal (valid/degraded)
• Quality level of the source (if the quality management is enabled)
• Preferential source
• Source priority
The internal synchronism T0 can assume one of the following statuses:
• Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is generated by the equip-
ment internal reference - Internal Source).
The user can force the status of the internal synchronism T0 (see Force the status of T0 synchronisation).
The forcing of the status Hold Over or Free Running is not the normal operation of the synchronism T0.
These forcings are maintenance operations and remain active until when the user does not disable them
or the Timeout period of the manual operation expires (if set).

BASE BAND
Ethernet Switch (Enh.). It manages the general configuration of the Ethernet Enhanced functionality.
LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.). It manages the Ethernet Enhanced external ports.
Port A (Enh.). It manages the Ethernet Enhanced internal port.

Ethernet Switch (Enh.)
Common Parameters. It manages the general configuration of the Ethernet Enhanced functionality and
the virtual LAN’s.
Priority Radio To Lan. It manages the correspondence between the priority (802.1p, PTOS/DSCP) of
the packets, in input to any Ethernet port, and the output queues of the LAN’s.
Priority Lan To Radio. It manages the correspondence between the priority (802.1p, MPLS, PTOS/DSCP)
of the packets, in input to any LAN port, and the output queues of the internal port of Ethernet Switch
(Radio port).
Compression. It manages the compression of the level-2 and level-3 headers present into an Ethernet
packet, in output from the Switch, before the traffic is inserted in the radio frame.

Common Parameters
WARNING Setting a specific management configuration introduces some restrictions on the setting of the
Ethernet Switch parameters (see Management configurations (more info) and Tab.3).
The Common Parameters command manages the general configuration parameters of the Ethernet En-
hanced functionality.
GENERAL SETTINGS OF THE ETHERNET SWITCH (ENHANCED)

Verify/modify the Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field
Verify/modify the maximum size of the accepted packet
Verify/modify the address learning modality in MAC Table
Verify/modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table
Reset the MAC Table
Verify/modify the hysteresis of the Link Loss Forwarding modality
VIRTUAL LAN
Verify the existing virtual LAN’s
Create a virtual Lan
Modify the configuration of a virtual Lan
Delete a virtual Lan
RADIO PACKET FRAGM.

Verify/modify the status of fragmentation of Ethernet packets
The selection of the command displays the Common Parameters contextual area
In order to deepen this topic, see Ethernet Enhanced Switch (more info)
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Common Parameters.
The QinQ ETH Type parameter indicates the Eth Type value in the S_Tag (Service Tag) QinQ field.
2. To change the parameter, type the new value.
WARNING When the in-band supervision is active (see Port Configuration) and the Double Tag function is
enabled (see LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.)/Port A (Enh.)), for the correct transit of the supervision packets
it is suggested to set the value 2048 as maximum packet size.
The Max Packet Size parameter indicates the maximum size (in bytes) of the accepted packet:
• 1522. Maximum size for standard Ethernet (IEEE Tagged Frames).
• 2048. Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 2048.

• 10240 (Jumbo). Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 10240 (Jumbo).
WARNING If some VLAN’s have been already created, when the partition and the indexing on VID (VLAN
Identifier) basis of the addresses in MAC Table (selection of option Enable), IT IS NECESSARY to execute
a software reset.
The parameter MAC Learning Vid basis indicates the address learning modality of MAC address in the
relevant table:
• Disable. A single MAC Table is defined where all the MAC Addresses are stored.
• Enable. A MAC Table is defined for every VLAN registered in VTU. The MAC Table identifier co-
incides with the VID of the corresponding VLAN.

The MAC Addr. Aging Time parameter indicates the validity period of the MAC addresses, dynamically
acquired and stored in the specific table.
2. To change the parameter, set the wished value.
Reset the MAC Table
2. Press Mac Table clear and confirm.

The system resets the MAC Table.
2. Select the LLF tab.

The LLF Hysteresis parameter indicates the time interval (hysteresis) after which the Link Loss Forward-
ing modality is activated and deactivated.
3. To change the parameter, move the cursor to the wished value.

Verify the existing virtual LAN’s
2. Select the Virtual Lan Config. tab.

The tab displays the existing virtual LAN’s.
Create a virtual Lan
3. Press Add.
4. Type, in VLan ID box, the identifier (within 2 and 4094) you wish to assign to the virtual LAN.
The parameter cannot be modified later.
5. If you wish to create more VLAN’s at the same time, type in the End Block box the identifier of the last
VLAN of the group (between 2 and 4094).
The value of End Block must be greater than the value of VLan ID and no VLAN with identifier within
the range End Block - VLan ID must be present in the list.
The system creates a number of VLAN’s (and inserts the relevant rows in the table) equal to the differ-
ence between the values of the parameters End Block and VLan ID, with identifiers in progression from
the lowest to the higher value, and automatically assigns the relevant Label using the format <Label>
<identifier>.
All the VLAN’s created at the same time get the same policy regarding the transit of packets through
the ports of the Ethernet switch.
6. Type, in Label box, the name (alphanumeric string up to 20 characters) you wish to assign to the virtual
LAN.
The system automatically suggest, as name of the virtual Lan, Vlan <identifier>. This name can be
changed as you wish.
7. In the box relevant to each external port (Lan 1, Lan 2) and internal port (Port A), select the option:
• Disable, not to enable the port for the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual Lan.
• Tagged, to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan. To the packets without Tag, in output from this port, is automatically added the Tag com-
posed by the information:
• Of priority; the value is defined in the Priority box of the origin port of the packet itself.
• Of Vlan ID which corresponds to the default Vlan ID (Default Vid box) of the origin port
of the packet.
The Vlan Table can be used, in case of traffic without Tag, only if the default Vlan ID of the input
port is contained as routing row in the table itself. If this condition is not satisfied, the Vlan Table
is not meaningful for all the traffic without Tag.
• Untag., to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan. The tag 802.1Q (information of priority and VLAN identifier) is removed to the packets in
output from the port.
• Unmodif., to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan. The tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) are not removed or added to the packets in
output from the port.
In order to create the VLAN, the transit of the packets must be enabled at least for one port (a value
different from Disable is set).

The Virtual Lan Config. tab displays the row relevant to the new virtual Lan.
If the displayed message is:
• Warning! VLAN ID already in the list. The set identifier corresponds to that of an already existing
VLAN. Change the value in the VLan ID box.
• The command is rejected to save system reachability. The operation is rejected not to compro-
mise the system reachability. Verify that the made settings are compatible with the manage-
ment configuration set for the equipment (see Tab.3).
3. Double click on the box relevant to the parameter of VLan you wish to change.
Except for the identifier (VLAN ID), all the parameters of a VLan can be modified (Label, Lan 1, Lan 2,
Port A).
The parameter setting modes are the same pointed out in par. Create a virtual Lan.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed and not communicated yet to the equip-
ment.
The changes are confirmed in Virtual Lan Config tab.
Delete a virtual Lan
3. Select the virtual Lan you wish to delete.

To remove more virtual LAN’s at the same time, select the rows corresponding to all the virtual LAN’s
to delete. The multiple selection can be executed keeping the key Ctrl or Shift pressed and clicking in
sequence on the interested rows.
The selected virtual LAN’s are removed from the list.
2. Select the Radio Packet Fragm. tab.

The Status parameter indicates the fragmentation status of the Ethernet packets, incoming from LAN
ports and sent to the Radio port, whose size is greater than the set value:
• Disabled. Fragmentation disabled: all Ethernet packets keep their size unchanged.
• Enabled 256. Fragmentation enabled: all Ethernet packets with size greater than 256 bytes are
fragmented into bursts whose size is limited to the specific value.
• Enabled 512. Fragmentation enabled: all Ethernet packets with size greater than 512 bytes are
fragmented into bursts whose size is limited to the specific value.
3. To change the parameter, set the wished value.

Common Parameters contextual area

General tab. The tab displays the general configuration parameters of the Ethernet Switch (Enhanced).
Virtual Lan Config. tab. The tab displays the existing virtual LAN’s.
LLF tab. The tab displays the hysteresis of the Link Loss Forwarding modality.
Radio Packet Fragm. tab. The tab displays the status of fragmentation of Ethernet packets.
Push-button:
Related Topics
Ethernet Enhanced Switch (more info)
General tab
The tab displays the general configuration parameters of the Ethernet Switch (Enhanced).
QinQ ETH type 0x. Eth Type value in the S_Tag (Service Tag) QinQ field
Max Packet size. Maximum size (in bytes) of the accepted packet:
• 1522. Maximum size for standard Ethernet (IEEE Tagged Frames).
• 2048. Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 2048.
• 10240 (Jumbo). Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 10240 (Jumbo).
MAC Learning Vid basis. Address learning modality of MAC address in the relevant table:
• Disable. A single MAC Table is defined where all the MAC Addresses are stored.
• Enable. A MAC Table is defined for every VLAN registered in VTU. The MAC Table identifier
coincides with the VID of the corresponding VLAN.
MAC Addr. Aging Time. Validity period of the MAC addresses, stored in the MAC Table.
Push-button:
Mac Table clear. Reset the MAC Table.
Related Topics
Virtual Lan Config. tab
The table present in the tab, displays the existing virtual LAN’s.
Every row of the table corresponds to a VLAN for which is pointed out in the column:
VLan ID. Identifier assigned to the virtual Lan by the user during its creation.
Label. Name assigned to the virtual Lan by the user during its creation or modification.
Lan1. Enabling of the LAN 1 to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual LAN:
• Disable. The port is not enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of
the virtual Lan.

• Untag. The port allows the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan. The tag 802.1Q (information of priority and VLAN identifier) is removed to the packets
in output from the port.
• Tagged. The port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual Lan. To the packets without Tag, in output from this port, is automatically added the
Tag composed by the information:
• Of priority; the value is defined in the Priority box of the origin port of the packet it-
self.
• Of Vlan ID which corresponds to the default Vlan ID (Default Vid box) of the origin
port of the packet.
The Vlan Table can be used, in case of traffic without Tag, only if the default Vlan ID of the
input port is contained as routing row in the table itself. If this condition is not satisfied, the
Vlan Table is not meaningful for all the traffic without Tag.
• Unmodif. The port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual Lan. The tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) are not removed or added to the
packets in output from the port.
Lan2. Enabling of the LAN 2 to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual LAN. For
the description of the values, refer to the Lan1 note.
PortA. Enabling of the internal port to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
LAN. For the description of the values, refer to the Lan1 note.
The Default VLan ID area displays the default VLan identifier of each Ethernet port of the equipment.
Push-button:
Add. Create a virtual Lan.
Remove. Delete a virtual Lan.
Apply changes. Confirm the changes made to VLAN’s.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes made to VLAN’s and not confirmed yet.
Related Topics
LLF tab
The tab displays the hysteresis of the Link Loss Forwarding modality.
LLF Hysteresis. Time interval (hysteresis) after which the Link Loss Forwarding modality is activated
and deactivated.
Related Topics
Radio Packet Fragm. tab
The tab displays the status of fragmentation of Ethernet packets
Status. fragmentation status of the Ethernet packets, incoming from LAN ports and sent to the Radio
port, whose size is greater than the set value:
• Disabled. Fragmentation disabled: all Ethernet packets keep their size unchanged.
• Enabled 256. Fragmentation enabled: all Ethernet packets with size greater than 256 bytes
are fragmented into bursts whose size is limited to the specific value.
• Enabled 512. Fragmentation enabled: all Ethernet packets with size greater than 512 bytes
are fragmented into bursts whose size is limited to the specific value.
Related Topics

Ethernet Enhanced Switch (more info)
Limitations in the configuration of the Ethernet Switch

Replacement of C-TAG in a packet with original C-TAG
Addition of S-TAG (QinQ – Double Tag) in a packet with C-TAG
Analysing the priority
MAC Table
Limitations in the configuration of the Ethernet Switch
only or for the contemporary transport of traffic and supervision (see Management configurations (more
info).
Setting a specific management configuration introduces some restrictions on the setting of the Ethernet
Switch parameters, as indicated in Tab.3, Tab.4, Tab.5 e Tab.6.
Tab.3 Restrictions on the parameters vs. management configuration (Switch Ethernet)
Key. LAO Local Access Only. OOB Out Of Band. NR No Restriction.
Parameter Management configuration

Lan1 Disabled Lan1 Disabled Lan1 In Band Lan1 In Band Lan1 In Band Lan1 In Band
Lan2 LAO Lan2 OOB Lan2 LAO Lan2 Drop Node Lan2 In Band Lan2 Disabled
Command Common Parameters - General tab
All NR NR NR NR NR NR
Command Common Parameters - Virtual Lan Config. tab
(1) (1) (2) (1) (3) (1) (4) (5) (5)
VLAN Table
Command Common Parameters - LLF tab
LLF Hysteresis NR NR NR NR NR NR
Command Common Parameters - Radio Packet Fragm. tab
Status NR NR NR NR NR NR
Command Priority Radio To Lan - Native 802.1p tab
Command Priority Radio To Lan - PTOS/DSCP Config. tab
Command Priority Lan To Radio - Native 802.1p/MPLS tab
Command Priority Lan To Radio - MPLS to 802.1p Rewrite tab
Command Priority Lan To Radio - PTOS/DSCP Config. tab
Command Compression
(1) During the creation of VLAN, LAN 2 must be set to Disable. Any other setting will involve the rejection
of the operation.
(2)
When the management configuration is activated, the following (not removable) VLANs are created:
• VLan ID 101 - LAN 1 (Unmodified) - LAN 2 (Disable) - Port A (Unmodified).
• VLan ID 1 - LAN 1 (Disable) - LAN 2 (Unmodified) - Port A (Unmodified).

(3)
When the management configuration is activated, the following (not removable) VLANs are created:
• VLan ID <In Band VLan Id value> - LAN 1 (Unmodified) - LAN 2 (Untagged) - Port A (Unmodi-
fied).
(4) When the management configuration is activated, the following (not removable) VLANs are created:
• VLan ID <In Band VLan Id value> - LAN 1 (Tagged) - LAN 2 (Untagged) - Port A (Tagged).
(5) When the management configuration is activated, the following (not removable) VLANs are created:
• VLan ID 101 - LAN 1 (Unmodified) - LAN 2 (Unmodified) - Port A (Unmodified).
• VLan ID 102 - LAN 1 (Unmodified) - LAN 2 (Unmodified) - Port A (Unmodified).
• VLan ID <In Band VLan Id value> - LAN 1 (Unmodified) - LAN 2 (Unmodified) - Port A (Unmod-
ified).
Tab.4 Restrictions on the parameters vs. management configuration (LAN 1 - Enh.)
Key. LAO Local Access Only. OOB Out Of Band. NR No Restriction. RO Read Only (unchangeable param-
eter). A Value automatically set at the activation of the management configuration.

Interface tab
Master/Slave NR NR NR NR NR NR
M/S NR NR NR NR NR NR
autonegotiation
Rate Control NR NR Full Rate Full Rate Full Rate Full Rate
A Full Rate RO RO RO RO
Flow Control NR NR NR NR NR NR
Cable Crossover NR NR NR NR NR NR
Mac Learning NR NR NR NR NR NR
Speed/Duplex NR NR NR NR NR NR
Input Filter Policing tab
Priority Management tab
802.1Q Management tab
Default VID NR NR NR NR NR NR
A 101 A 101 A 101 A 101 A 101 A 101
802.1Q Setting NR NR Disabled not Disabled not NR NR
A Disabled allowed allowed A Fallback A Fallback
A Fallback A Fallback
Traffic Treatment Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent Port NR NR
Port to Port Port to Port Port to Port to Port Transport A Transparent A Transparent
Transport Transport Transport RO Bridge Port Bridge Port
RO RO RO Based Based
Provider NR NR NR NR NR NR
A Disabled A Disabled A Disabled A Disabled
Queue Man. Radio to Lan tab
Port Based VLAN tab
LAN2 Disable Disable Disable Enable NR NR
RO RO RO RO A Enabled A Enabled
Port A NR NR NR NR NR NR
A Enabled A Enabled A Enabled A Enabled

LLF tab
A Disable A Disable A Disable A Disable
Line Loop tab
A Disable A Disable A Disable A Disable
Laser Control tab
Tab.5 Restrictions on the LAN 2 (Enh.) parameters vs. management configuration

Interface tab
Master/Slave NR NR NR NR NR NR
M/S NR NR NR NR NR NR
autonegotiation
Rate Control Full Rate Full Rate Full Rate Full Rate Full Rate NR
RO RO RO RO RO
Flow Control NR NR NR NR NR NR
Cable Crossover NR NR NR NR NR NR
Mac Learning Disable NR Disable NR NR NR
RO RO
Speed/Duplex NR NR NR NR NR NR
All RO RO RO RO NR NR
Priority Selection Port Default NR Port Default Port Default NR NR
RO A Port Default RO RO
Default Internal 7 NR 7 7 NR NR
Priority RO A7 RO RO
802.1p Remapping - NR - - NR NR
Default VID NR 1 In Band VLan Id In Band VLan Id NR NR
A 102 RO value value A 102 A 102
RO RO
802.1Q Setting NR Disabled Secure Secure NR NR
A Disabled RO RO RO A Fallback A Fallback
Traffic Treatment Transparent Transparent Transparent Transparent NR NR
Port to Port Port to Port Port to Port Port to Port A Transparent A Transparent
Transport Transport Transport Transport Bridge Port Bridge Port
RO RO RO RO Based Based
Provider NR Disable Disable Disable NR NR
A Disable RO RO RO A Disable A Disable
Egress Priority NR NR NR NR NR NR
Policy

Port Based VLAN tab
LAN1 Disable Disable Disable Enable NR NR
RO RO RO RO A Enabled A Enabled
Port A Disable NR Disable NR NR NR
RO A Enable RO A Enable A Enable A Enable
LLF tab
All Disable Disable Disable Disable NR NR
RO RO RO RO A Disable
Line Loop tab
Line Loop Disable Disable Disable Disable NR NR
RO RO RO RO A Disable
Tab.6 Restrictions on the parameters vs. management configuration (Port A - Enh.)

Interface tab
Port NR NR NR NR NR NR
MAC Learning NR NR NR NR NR NR
A Enable
Priority Selection tab
Queue Management Lan To Radio tab
Ingress Filtering NR Fallback NR NR NR NR
Check RO A Fallback A Fallback A Fallback A Fallback
Default VID NR 111 NR NR NR NR
RO A 111 A 111 A 111 A 111
C-VID/S-VID Re- NR NR NR NR NR NR
write A Instances reset A Instances reset A Instances reset A Instances reset A Instances reset
Port Based VLan tab
LAN1 NR NR NR NR NR NR
A Enable A Enable A Enable A Enable
LAN2 Disable NR Disable NR NR NR
RO A Enable RO A Enable A Enable A Enable
Replacement of C-TAG in a packet with original C-TAG
This functionality allows replacing a default TAG, in output on the basis of the values of the port in input,
to an already tagged packet in input.
To implement this function, the operator has to associate, in the row present in VLAN Table Unit (VTU)
relevant to port default, Untagged on the LAN port in input and Tagged on the Lan port in output.
Necessary conditions are:
• The ports in input and in output is configured to Fallback or Secure.

• In VLAN table, a VLAN is configured equal to the parameter Default Vid of the port in input (value
of VID which will be written), defined as unmodified for the port in input and tagged for the port
in output
The TAG replaced in the packet in output from the switch will be composed by:
• Default VID of the input port which the packet comes from
• Default Pbit of the input port which the packet comes from, if 802.1p is disabled
• Origin Pbit (possibly re-mapped) of the packet in input, if 802.1p is enabled (or remapping is
enable)
Addition of S-TAG (QinQ – Double Tag) in a packet with C-TAG
This functionality allows adding a second TAG (S-TAG) in output to an already tagged packet in input, on
the basis of the values of the port in input.
Necessary conditions are:
• The input ports of the local switch are configured in Fallback and the output ports of remote
switch in Secure Provider.
• In VLAN table, is configured a VLAN equal to the parameter Default Vid of the port in input, de-
fined as Unmodified for the input port and Tagged for the port in output
The S-TAG added to the packet in output from the switch will be composed by:
• Ethernet Type defined in Ethernet Switch QinQ Eth type (default 0x9100)
• Default VID of the input port which the packet comes from.
• Default Pbit of the input port which the packet comes from, if 802.1p is disabled
• Origin Pbit (possibly re-mapped) of the packet in input if 802.1p is enabled (or remapping is
enable)
Notes:
• When the Switch works at S-TAG level, C-TAG is left unchanged.
Analysing the priority
The equipment allows analysing the priority at level 2, according to the standard 802.1p (values 0…7), or
at level 3 (PTOS/DSCP field). In direction “LAN ports -> Radio port” (internal port of Ethernet Switch) the
priority of MPLS is analysed too.
The priority standard can be modified by the user and can be different for each Ethernet port.
MAC Table
The MAC Table is a table created by the Ethernet Switch to keep trace of the reachability of the equipment
present in the network.
For the editing of the MAC Table, the Switch uses the MAC address (source) of the packets in input and the
number of the port through which a packet enters in the Switch as information source.
The source MAC of a packet in input to the Switch is subjected to Learning operation and possibly registered
in MAC Table.
The destination MAC of a packet in input to the Switch is subjected to search operation. If it is found in
MAC Table as source MAC of another user, the port associated to it is used as destination of the considered
traffic.
If the destination MAC Address is not present in the MAC Table, the Switch transmits the frame on all its
own interfaces, excluding only that where the frame itself has been received.
A MAC address stored in the table is automatically deleted from the table itself if not used within a given
time period (Aging Time).
The address learning in MAC Table is usually automatic.

ALFOplus equipment allow enabling/disabling the learning of Source MAC Addresses according to different
criteria select able by the user:

1.Automatic learning on a single MAC Table.
2.Automatic learning on different MAC Tables indicized by:
a. Native VID of a VLAN 802.1Q, if the input port is in Fallback or Secure and the considered VLAN
is registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU).
b. Port default VID, if the incoming traffic is Untagged or, if tagged, the option 802.1Q is disabled
on the considered port or if the native VID of the incoming traffic is NOT registered in VTU. In
practice, in this condition the partition of MAC Table is made on port basis.
3.Learning disabled; in this condition MAC Table is not used.
The learning on VID basis is common to all the ports and the option is select able at global level.
The learning on port basis can be selected independently for every different LAN port.
The automatic learning on a single MAC Table and the possible disabling of Learning can be selected on the
single external ports (LAN) and internal port (Radio).
If options a. and b. are selected at the same time, option a. has priority.
Via application, it is possible:

• Delete the content of the MAC Table on the equipment.
• Define the validity period of the addresses stored in the MAC Table of the equipment (parameter
MAC Addr. Aging Time).
• Define if the learning of the Source Addresses must be made on a common MAC Table or on
specific partitions for every single VID registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU) (parameter MAC
Learning Vid basis).
• Enable/disable the automatic learning of MAC Address within the VTU for every single port of
the Ethernet Switch and, if enabled, to define if this learning must be made on a single MAC
Table common to the whole Switch or on a partition specific for the port (parameter MAC Learn-
ing).

Priority Radio To Lan
The Priority Radio To Lan command manages the correspondence between the priority (802.1p, PTOS/
DSCP) of the packets, in input to any Ethernet port, and LAN output queues.
Verify/modify the output queue of LAN ports which a packet is assigned to depending on its 802.1p
priority Tag
Verify/modify the output queue of LAN ports which a packet is assigned to depending on its PTOS/DSCP
field
The selection of the command displays the Priority Radio To Lan contextual area
Verify/modify the output queue of LAN ports which a packet is assigned to depending on its
802.1p priority Tag
WARNING The setting of the parameter is common to all the LAN ports of the Ethernet Switch.
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Priority Radio To Lan.
The 802.1p Priority table indicates the output queue of the LAN ports which a packet, in input to any
Ethernet port, is assigned to, depending on its 802.1p priority Tag.
The rows of the table correspond to the output queues available for the LAN port:
• Queue 0. Output queue with 0 priority (low priority).
• Queue 1. Output queue with 1 priority.
• Queue 3. Output queue with 3 priority (high priority).
The columns of the table (0 ÷ 7) correspond to the Tag 802.1p value of the packet in input to a port.
The active option indicates which output queue (Queue…) the packet in input is associated to, whose
value of priority Tag (802.1p) corresponds to the value 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7.
2. To change the parameter, select the option corresponding to the wished combination output queue -
Tag 802.1p.
For the same value of Tag 802.1p, only one queue at a time can be selected.
Verify/modify the output queue of LAN ports which a packet is assigned to depending on its
PTOS/DSCP field
WARNING The setting of the parameters is common to all the LAN ports of the Ethernet Switch.
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Priority Radio To Lan.
2. Select the PTOS/DSCP Config tab.
The table present in the tab displays the correspondence between the priority PTOS/DSCP of the pack-
ets, in input to any Ethernet port, and the LAN output queues.
Every row of the table corresponds to a possible value for the relevant PTOS/DSCP field. For every val-
ue, is pointed out in the column:
• Value. The value expressed in binary digits.
• Precedence, Delay, Throug., Reliab., DSCP. For the description of the parameter present in these
columns refer to RFC 2474, 2597 and 2598 (Request For Comments).

• Internal Priority (Queue). The queue which the packet in input to the specific port, whose PTOS/
DSCP has the value displayed in the row, is assigned to is displayed:
The List Filter parameter allows to activate the filters to the display of the list. If set the option:
• View All. The list displays all the values.
• View Queue 0. The list displays only the values associated to the 0 output queue.
To change the displaying of the list, select the wished values.
The Filter parameter allows to set the IP format which the DSCP field refers to:
• IP v4 DSCP. The DSCP column is meaningful for traffic incoming in the Switch with IPv4 format.
3. To change the output queue, which a PTOS/DSCP value is associated to, select, in the Filter box, the
IP format which the DSCP field refers to.
4. Double click on the box (column Internal Priority (Queue)) relevant to the output queue you wish to
change and select the wished option.
5. Repeat the previous step to change the output queue of all the wished PTOS/DSCP value.

Priority Radio To Lan contextual area

Native 802.1p tab. The tab displays the output queue of the LAN ports which a packet, in input to any
Ethernet port, is assigned to, depending on its 802.1p priority Tag.
PTOS/DSCP Config. tab. The tab displays the correspondence between the priority PTOS/DSCP of the
packets, in input to any Ethernet port, and the LAN output queues.
Push-button:
Native 802.1p tab
The tab displays the output queue of the LAN ports which a packet, in input to any Ethernet port, is as-
signed to, depending on its 802.1p priority Tag.
802.1p Priority. In this table the output queue of the LAN ports which a packet, in input to any Ether-
net port, is assigned to, depending on its 802.1p priority Tag.
The rows of the table correspond to the output queue available for the LAN:
• Queue 0. Queue with 0 priority (low priority).
• Queue 1. Queue with 1 priority.
• Queue 3. Queue with 3 priority (high priority).
The columns of the table (0 ÷ 7) correspond to the Tag 802.1p value of the packet in input to a port.
The 802.1p Priority table is common to all the LAN ports of the Ethernet Switch.
Related Topics
Verify/modify the output queue of LAN ports which a packet is assigned to depending on its 802.1p
priority Tag
PTOS/DSCP Config. tab
The tab displays the correspondence between the priority PTOS/DSCP of the packets, in input to any Ether-
net port, and the LAN output queues.
Every row of the table, present in the tab, corresponds to a possible value for the relevant PTOS/DSCP
field. For every value, is pointed out in the column:
Value. The value expressed in binary digits.
Precedence, Delay, Throug., Reliab., DSCP. For the description of the parameter present in these
Internal Priority (Queue). The queue which the packet in input to the specific port, whose PTOS/
The setting of the parameters is common to all the LAN ports of the Ethernet Switch.

The List Filter parameter allows to activate the filters to the list of value. If set the option:
• IP v4 DSCP. The DSCP column is meaningful for traffic incoming in the Switch in the IPv4 format.
Related Topics
Verify/modify the output queue of LAN ports which a packet is assigned to depending on its PTOS/DSCP
field

Priority Lan To Radio
The Priority Radio To Lan command manages the correspondence between the priority (802.1p, MPLS,
PTOS/DSCP) of the packets, in input from LAN ports, and the output queues of the internal port of Ethernet
Switch (Radio port).
Verify/modify the output queue of Radio port which a packets is assigned to depending on its native
802.1p priority Tag
Verify/modify the output queue of Radio port which a packet is assigned to depending on its native
MPLS priority Tag
Verify/modify the correspondence between MPLS priority and 802.1p priority of the packets in input
from LAN ports and in output from Radio port
Verify/modify the output queue of Radio port which a packets is assigned to depending on its PTOS/
DSCP field
The selection of the command displays the Priority Lan To Radio contextual area
Verify/modify the output queue of Radio port which a packets is assigned to depending on its
native 802.1p priority Tag
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Priority Lan To Radio.
Table 802.1p Priority indicates the correspondence between native 802.1p priority, possible present in
packets in input from LAN ports, and the output queues of Radio ports.
The rows of the table correspond to the output queue of the Radio ports:
The columns of the table (0 ÷ 7) correspond to the Tag 802.1p value.
Tag 802.1p.
For the same value of Tag 802.1p, only one queue at a time can be selected.
Verify/modify the output queue of Radio port which a packet is assigned to depending on its
native MPLS priority Tag
Table MPLS Priority indicates the correspondence between native MPLS priority, possible present in
packets in input from LAN ports, and the output queues of Radio port.
The rows of the table correspond to the output queue of the Radio port:

The columns of the table (0 ÷ 7) correspond to the Tag MPLS value.
value of priority Tag (MPLS) corresponds to the value 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7.
Tag MPLS.
For the same value of Tag MPLS, only one queue at a time can be selected.
Verify/modify the correspondence between MPLS priority and 802.1p priority of the packets in
input from LAN ports and in output from Radio port
WARNING The setting of the parameter is common to all the LAN ports of the Ethernet Switch
2. Select the MPLS to 802.1p Rewrite tab.

The table, present in the tab, indicates the correspondence between MPLS priority and 802.1p priority
of packets in input from LAN ports and in output from Radio port.
The columns point out the value of MPLS priority (Native MPLS); while the rows point out value of
802.1p priority (802.1p Priority).
The active option indicates which 802.1p priority every single native MPLS priority is re-mapped to.
Correspondence can be 1 to 1, that is same priority in two fields, or arbitrary according to the function
chosen by the user. For instance, the priority MPLS 7 can be re-mapped as priority 0 in field 802.1p.
3. To re-map a MPLS priority, select the option corresponding to wished combination Tag MPLS - Tag
802.1p.
For a single value of Tag MPLS, only one value at a time of Tag 802.1p can be selected.
Verify/modify the output queue of Radio port which a packets is assigned to depending on its
PTOS/DSCP field
2. Select the PTOS/DSCP Config tab.
The table present in the tab displays the correspondence between PTOS/DSCP priority of the packets,
in input to any Ethernet ports, and the output queue of Radio port.
Every row of the table corresponds to a possible value for the relevant PTOS/DSCP field. For every val-
ue, is pointed out in the column:
• Value. The value expressed in binary digits.
• Precedence, Delay, Throug., Reliab., DSCP. For the description of the parameter present in these
• Internal Priority (Queue). The queue which the packet in input to the specific port, whose PTOS/

3. To change the output queue, which a PTOS/DSCP value is associated to, select, in the Filter box, the
IP format which the DSCP field refers to.
4. Double click on the box (column Internal Priority (Queue)) relevant to the output queue you wish to
change and select the wished option.
5. Repeat the previous step to change the output queue of all the wished PTOS/DSCP value.

Priority Lan To Radio contextual area

Native 802.1p/MPLS tab. The tab displays the correspondence between native 802.1p priority and/or
MPLS, possible present in packets in input from LAN ports, and the output queues of the internal port
of the Ethernet Switch (Radio port).
MPLS to 802.1p Rewrite tab. The tab displays the correspondence between MPLS priority and 802.1p
priority of packets in input from LAN ports and in output from Radio port.
PTOS/DSCP Config. tab. The tab displays the correspondence between PTOS/DSCP priority of the pack-
ets, in input to any Ethernet ports, and the output queue of Radio port.
Push-button:
Native 802.1p/MPLS tab
The tab displays the correspondence between native 802.1p and/or MPLS priority and the output queues
of Radio port.
802.1p Priority. This table indicates the correspondence between native 802.1p priority, possible pre-
sent in packets in input from LAN ports, and the output queues of Radio port.
The rows of the table correspond to the eight output queue of the Radio port:
The columns of the table (0 ÷ 7) correspond to the Tag 802.1p value.
MPLS Priority. This table indicates the correspondence between native MPLS priority, possible present
in packets in input from LAN ports, and the output queues of Radio port.
The rows of the table correspond to the eight output queue of the Radio port:
The columns of the table (0 ÷ 7) correspond to the Tag MPLS value.
Related Topics
Verify/modify the output queue of Radio port which a packets is assigned to depending on its native
802.1p priority Tag

Verify/modify the output queue of Radio port which a packet is assigned to depending on its native
MPLS priority Tag
MPLS to 802.1p Rewrite tab
The table, present in the tab, indicates the correspondence between MPLS priority and 802.1p priority of
packets in input from LAN ports and in output from Radio port.
The columns point out the value of MPLS priority (Native MPLS); while the rows point out value of 802.1p
priority (802.1p Priority).
The active option indicates which 802.1p priority every single native MPLS priority is re-mapped to.
Correspondence can be 1 to 1, that is same priority in two fields, or arbitrary according to the function
chosen by the user. For instance, the priority MPLS 7 can be remapped as priority 0 in field 802.1p.
The table is common to all the LAN ports of the Ethernet Switch.
Related Topics
Verify/modify the correspondence between MPLS priority and 802.1p priority of the packets in input
from LAN ports and in output from Radio port
PTOS/DSCP Config. tab
The tab displays the correspondence between PTOS/DSCP priority of the packets, in input to any Ethernet
ports, and the output queue of Radio port.
Every row of the table, present in the tab, corresponds to a possible value for the relevant PTOS/DSCP
field. For every value, is pointed out in the column:
Value. The value expressed in binary digits.
Precedence, Delay, Throug., Reliab., DSCP. For the description of the parameter present in these
Internal Priority (Queue). The queue which the packet in input to the specific port, whose PTOS/

Related Topics
Verify/modify the output queue of Radio port which a packets is assigned to depending on its PTOS/
DSCP field

Compression
WARNING Command available only if the compression function is supported by equipment hardware.
The Compression command manages the compression of the level-2 and level-3 headers present in an
Ethernet packet, in output from the Switch, before the traffic is inserted in the radio frame.
Verify/modify the compression of the headers of Ethernet packets in input from LAN ports
The selection of the command displays the Compression contextual area
WARNING Operation available only if the compression function is supported by equipment hardware.
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Compression.

The Compression contextual area is displayed, which shows the possible headers which could be com-
pressed if present in the incoming traffic.
2. To change the compression status of one or more headers, activate or deactivate the relevant box.
When necessary, set the configuration parameters of a field as pointed out in the previous step.

Compression contextual area
The contextual area displays the possible headers which could be compressed if present in the incoming
traffic. The fields of Ethernet packet available for compression are:
Ethernet. Compression of header of Ethernet packet (header). Active box ( ) indicates that compres-
sion is enabled; inactive box means compression disabled. When compression is active, the following
parameters are present in the area below:
• Bytes Header. Number of bytes in the header which are compressed depending on the set-
tings made for the options below. Maximum number of byte: 124. Parameter is read-only.
• Bytes Context+Dynamic. Maximum number of bytes used by the co/decompression process
and calculated by a proprietary algorithm. These bytes can be used depending on the set-
tings made for the options below. Maximum number of byte: 118. Parameter is read-only.
• Number of Labels and Tags. Number of MPLS label + Tag Ethernet enabled. Maximum num-
ber of label MPLS + Tag Ethernet: 8. Parameter is read-only.
• C_TAG (802.1Q). Compression of field 802.1Q (priority and identifier of VLAN). Active box
indicates that compression is enabled; inactive box means compression disabled. When
compression is active, the following parameters are present in the area below:
• Q-in-Q (802.1ad). Compression of field S_Tag (Service Tag) QinQ. Active box indi-
cates that compression is enabled; inactive box means compression disabled. When
compression is active, the following parameters are present in the area below:
• Max Number of S-TAG. Maximum number of inserted Provider Tags which can
be compressed. The parameter can be set to values 1 or 2.
• MPLS. Compression of MPLS priority field. Active box indicates that compression is enabled;
inactive box means compression disabled. When compression is active, the following param-
eters are present in the area below:
• Max Number of Labels. Maximum number of inserted MPLS Labels which can be com-
pressed.
• Control Word (RFC4385). Compression of field Control Word. Active box indicates that
compression is enabled; inactive box means compression disabled.
• EoMPLS (Ethernet over MPLS). Compression of EoMPLS protocol. Active box indicates
that compression is enabled; inactive box means compression disabled. When com-
pression is active, the following parameters are present in the area below:
• C_TAG (802.1Q). Compression of field 802.1Q (priority and identifier of VLAN)
for EoMPLS. Active box indicates that compression is enabled; inactive box means
compression disabled. When compression is active, the following parameters are
present in the area below:
• Q-in-Q (802.1ad). Compression of field S_Tag (Service Tag) QinQ for EoM-
PLS. Active box indicates that compression is enabled; inactive box means
compression disabled. When compression is active, the following parameters
are present in the area below:
• Max Number of S-TAG. Maximum number of inserted Provider Tags which
can be compressed for EoMPLS. The parameter can be set to values 1 or 2.
It is suggested to activate the EoMPLS compression only when the MPLS traffic on the
radio equipment is Ethernet over MPLS.
• IP+. Compression of level-3 header (if present). Active box indicates that compression is
enabled; inactive box means compression disabled. When compression is active, the area
below indicates the format of the traffic in input to the Switch:
• IPv4. Format IPv4.
• IPv4 or IPv6. Format IPv4 or IPv6.
• Tunneling IPv4 - IPv4/IPv6. Compression of IP field possibly inserted in an IP frame.
The format currently in use is pointed out by the active option. The parameter can be mod-
ified.
If the option IPv4 or IPv4 or IPv6 is active, even the following parameter is displayed:
• UDP. Compression of field UDP (if present). If the active option is:
• Disable. Compression inactive.
• Enable. Compression of field UDP (if present) active.
• Enable+RTP. Compression of fields UDP and RTP (if present) active.
The parameter can be modified.

Push-button:
Related Topics

LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.)
WARNING Setting a management configuration introduces some restrictions on the setting of the Ethernet
Switch parameters (see Management configurations (more info), Tab.4 and Tab.5).
The LAN 1 (Enh.) e LAN 2 (Enh.) commands manage the Ethernet Enhanced external port.
When one of two commands is selected, the LAN <number relevant to the selected Lan> (Enh.) contextual
area opens, where the specific LAN can be managed.
STATUS AND COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS
Verify/modify the enabling status of the LAN

Verify/modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the LAN
Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the
operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN
Verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the LAN
Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in MAC Table for the LAN
Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the LAN
Verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) for the LAN
Verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line synchronism for
the LAN
INPUT FILTER POLICING

Verify/modify the modality and the criteria used to limit the traffic in input from the LAN
PRIORITY PARAMETERS
Verify the current management modality of protocol 802.1Q

Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LAN to the output
queue of the Radio port
Verify/modify the value for Port Default and 802.1p priority
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the LAN
Verify/modify the Service Tag List table
Verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue of the LANs
VIRTUAL LAN PARAMETERS
Verify/modify the default VID value of the LAN

Verify/modify the management of the 802.1Q field on the messages in input from the LAN
Verify/modify the traffic transport modality (point-point or Bridge)
Verify/modify the management of Provider Tag in the packets in input from the LAN
Verify/overwrite the C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN and forwarded to the Radio with
a different VID
Verify the list of VID’s registered in VLAN Table Unit and associated to the LAN
Verify/modify the management of the LAN in Provider mode
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the LAN can transit
LLF PARAMETERS
Verify/modify the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality of the LAN
LOOP
Activate/deactivate the loop on line side of the LAN
LASER PARAMETERS
Verify the status and the configuration of the laser (LAN)

Modify the enabling status of the laser (LAN)
Modify the transmission mode of the laser (LAN)

Enable manually the laser transmission (LAN)
Execute the test laser operating status (LAN)
The selection of the command displays the LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.) contextual area
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.) or LAN 2 (Enh.).

The Rate Control parameter indicates the enabling status of the port:
• Disable. The LAN is not enabled to the use.
• Full Rate. The LAN is enabled to the use of the maximum bit rate relevant to the port.
• ...Kb/...Mb. The LAN is enabled to the use with bit rate limited to the specific value.
WARNING Operation available and meaningful only for ports with electrical interface for which the use of
the LAN is enabled (see Verify/modify the enabling status of the LAN).

The Cable Crossover parameter indicates the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines:
• MDI (NIC). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card modality).
• MDIX (switch). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch modality).
• Auto. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic modality.
Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation
is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN

The Speed/Duplex parameter indicates the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto ne-
gotiation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN.
For LAN 1 (Enh.) and LAN 2 (Enh.) with electrical interface, the following values are available:
• Full-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the
data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.
• Half-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and the

• Half-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and
the data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.
• Auto. The auto negotiation is enabled.
For LAN 1 (Enh.) with optical interface, the following values are available:
• Full-Duplex-1G. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the
data transmission speed through the LAN is 1GMbit/s.

The Flow Control Full Dplx/Back Pressure Half Dplx parameter indicates the activation status of the flow
control of the LAN:
• Disable. The flow control is forced inactive.
• Enable. The flow control is forced active.
• Auto. The flow control is automatic (automatically activated or deactivated by the auto negoti-
ation procedure).
Option available only if the auto negotiation is active for the port (Speed/Duplex box - Auto op-
tion).
In Full-Duplex modality, the flow control is regulated according to the 802.3x normative. In Half-Duplex
modality, the flow control is regulated according to the Back Pressure technique.
WARNING The MAC-based routing functionality in the Ethernet Switch is available only if enabled this func-
tion.

The MAC Learning parameter indicates the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Ad-
dress in the specific table (MAC Table):
• Disable. The automatic learning of the MAC Address is disabled.
• Enable. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the addresses in the table
takes place analysing only the field MAC Address and is registered in a single MAC Table.
• Learn. on port basis. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the address-
es in the table takes place associating the MAC Address to the segment of MAC Table indicized
by the Default VID value associated to the port which the traffic is income from.

Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the LAN
WARNING Operation available only if the auto negotiation is enabled (Speed/Duplex and/or Flow Control...
box - Auto option).
2. Press Restart Autonegotiation and confirm.
WARNING Operation available and meaningful only for ports with electrical interface for which the auton-
egotiation is active and the 1000Base-T configuration is active (see Verify/modify the enabling status of
the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission
speed used by the LAN).

The Master/Slave parameter indicates the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) of the LAN:
• Master. The line synchronism is generated starting from the local clock.
• Slave. The line synchronism is generated with the clock retrieved from the line (Loop Time).
Verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the
line synchronism for the LAN
WARNING Operation available and meaningful only for ports with electrical interface for which the auton-
egotiation is active and the 1000Base-T configuration is active (see Verify/modify the enabling status of
the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission
speed used by the LAN).

The M/S Autoneg. parameter indicates the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles
of the line synchronism of the LAN:
• Enable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is au-
tomatic.
• Disable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is
forced. In this case, the role defined in the Master/Slave box is used.
Verify/modify the modality and the criteria used to limit the traffic in input from the
LAN

2. Select the Input Filter Policing tab.
The parameter Mode indicates the modality to use to limit the traffic in input from LAN port:
• Disable. Option disabled: the traffic in input is not limited according to specific criteria.
• UNI Port based. Option enabled: all the traffic in input is limited on port basis.
• EVC C_Vid Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the packets with C-VID
(Customer VLAN Identifier) defined by the user and pointed out in the table below.
• COS C_Vid + Internal Priority Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the
packets with C-VID values and priority defined by the user and pointed out in the table below.
• EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the packets with
S-VID (Service VLAN Identifier) and C-VID values defined by the user and pointed out in the
table below.
• COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Internal Priority Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only
for the packets with S-VID (Service VLAN Identifier) and C-VID values and priority defined by
the user and pointed out in the table below.
The Not Registered Traffic Default Color parameter shows the colour preset for the packets not associ-
ated to any traffic profile defined by the user (Bandwidth Profile):
• Green (MEF Compliant). The packets are treated as belonging to the green profile.
• Red. The packets are discarded.
The table present in the tab will point out, according to the set modality, the criteria for the traffic lim-
itation defined by the user (Bandwidth Profile).
Every row of the table corresponds to one criterion. The configuration parameters (pointed out in the
table columns) of the criterion change depending on the setting of the parameter Mode. In detail, if the
active value is:
• UNI Port Based the table contains the columns:
• CIR (Committed Information Rate). Transmission rate (expressed in Mbit/s) ensured in
normal operating condition of the network (throughput).
• EIR (Excess Information Rate). Band exceeding that set by CIR.
• CBS. (Committed Burst Size). Traffic burst which the network ensures to store.
• EBS (Excessive Burst Size). Quantity of data, besides CBS, which the network can store.
• CF (Coupling Flag). Modality to control the traffic declared Yellow.
• Enabled. The average value, in the long period, of the traffic declared Yellow has
maximum limit CIR+EIR. This value is not fixed, but depends on the traffic de-
clared Green.
• Disabled. The average value, in the long period, of the traffic declared Yellow has
maximum limit EIR.
In both cases, the Burst Size of the Yellow traffic has maximum value EBS.
• EVC C_Vid Based the table contains the columns:
• C_Vid. Identifier C-VID of the packet in input.
• CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS and CF. The description is the same reported for the value UNI Port
Based, but only for the traffic with identifier C-VID set by the user, and not on the whole
traffic incoming from LAN port.
• COS C_Vid + Internal Priority Based the table contains the columns:
• Internal Priority. Levels of priority (range of values between minimum and maximum) of
the packet in input.
Based, but only for the traffic with identifier C-VID and 802.1p priority set by the user,
and not on the whole traffic incoming from LAN port.
• EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based the table contains the columns:
• S_Vid. Identifier S-VID of the packet in input.
• CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS e CF. The description is the same reported for the value UNI Port
Based, but only for the traffic with identifiers S-VID and C-VID set by the user, and not
on the whole traffic incoming from LAN port.
• COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Internal Priority Based the table contains the columns:

Based, but only for the traffic with identifiers S-VID and C-VID and with 802.1p priority
set by the user, and not on the whole traffic incoming from LAN port.
3. To change the Mode parameter select the wished option, press Apply and confirm.
The values EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based and COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Internal Priority Based can be set only if,
in the tab 802.1Q Management, the parameter 802.1q Settings is set to the value Secure and the pa-
rameter Provider is active.
The passage from modality UNI Port based, EVC C_Vid Based or COS C_Vid + Internal Priority Based
to modality EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based or COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Internal Priority Based and vice versa de-
letes all the elements present in the table.
The passage from any modality to the value Disable deletes all the items present in the table and dis-
able it. Moreover, the value Green (MEF Compliant) is automatically forced for the parameter Not Reg-
istered Traffic Default Color.
4. To modify the Not Registered Traffic Default Color parameter select the wished option, press Apply and
confirm.
If the value Red is selected, a message warns that the packets without an associated band profile will
be discarded.
The parameter is not available if the Disable value is set for the Mode parameter.
5. To add a criterion to the list:
a. Press Add.
b. Set all the parameters present in the window.

Meaning and values of the parameters are pointed out in step 2.
c. Press Apply and confirm.
If, for the parameter Mode, the active value is:

• Disable. No element can be added to the table.
• UNI Port based. Only one element can be added to the table.
• EVC C_Vid Based, COS C_Vid + Internal Priority Based, EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based or COS S_Vid/
C_Vid + Internal Priority Based. More elements can be added to the table.
6. To change a criterion of the list:
a. Double click on the box relevant to the parameter you wish to change and set the new value.
Meaning and values of the parameters are pointed out in step 2.
Pressing Revert changes cancels the change executed.
b. Press Apply changes and confirm.
If, for the parameter Mode, the active value is:

• Disable. No element in the table is available to be modified.
• UNI Port based. All the parameters can be modified.
• EVC C_Vid Based. All the parameters can be modified, except C_Vid.
• COS C_Vid + Internal Priority Based. All the parameters can be modified, except C_Vid and In-
ternal Priority.
• EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based. All the parameters can be modified, except S_Vid and C_Vid.
• COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Internal Priority Based. All the parameters can be modified, except S_Vid,
C_Vid and Internal Priority.
7. To delete a criterion from the list:
a. Select the criterion you wish to delete.

b. Press Remove and confirm.

2. Select the Priority Management tab.

The parameter Current 802.1Q Settings indicates the current status of the management modality of
protocol 802.1Q:
• Disabled. The LAN does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input. They will be sent
only to the ports pointed out in the area Port Based VLAN.
• Fallback. The traffic in input from the port is subjected both to port based routing (Port Based
VLAN) and to VLAN Table Unit (VTU) based routing.
• Secure (C_vid Filtering). The traffic in input from the port is subjected only to the routing defined
by VTU.
• Secure (Service Provider Port). The traffic in input from the port can be only of type Provider
and will be subjected only to the routing defined by VTU.
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the
LAN to the output queue of the Radio port

The Priority Selection parameter indicates the priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input
to the considered LAN, to the output of the Radio port.
If the parameter Current 802.1Q Settings has value:
• Disabled the following options are present:
• Port Default. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to
the default value set by the user.
• Native TOS/DSCP. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port accord-
ing to the TOS/DSCP value present in the native IP field.
• Native MPLS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to
the priority value present in native MPLS field.
• Fallback or Secure (C_vid Filtering) the following options are present:
• Native 802.1p (C_Vid). The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port ac-
cording to the value of native 802.1p priority.
• 802.1p (C_PCP) rewrite with MPLS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the
Radio port according to the priority value present in native MPLS field and this value will
be rewritten in the field 802.1p of C-VID.
• Secure (Service Provider Port) the following options are present:
• Native 802.1p (S_Vid). The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port ac-
cording to the value of native 802.1p priority.

be rewritten in the field 802.1p of C-VID.
• 802.1p (S_PCP) rewrite with MPLS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the
be rewritten in the field 802.1p of S-VID.

The parameter Default Internal Priority indicates the value used to define the output queue of the Radio
port when the selected priority criteria is Port Default (see parameter Priority Selection) and value used
as priority 802.1p added to the untagged packets entering in the considered LAN and they will exit
tagged from the corresponding remote LAN port (0: lowest priority, 7: highest priority).
WARNING Operation available and meaningful only if the analysis of the value of the priority 802.1p (pa-
rameter Priority set to the Native 802.1p (C_Vid) value) is active.

The tab, if the analysis of the priority 802.1p value is active, displays a table pointing out the mapping
of priority 802.1p within Tag VLan (priority 802.1p present into a packet in input to a port can be rem-
apped in output from the Switch with a different priority value).
Table rows (802-1p INPUT Priority - 7÷0) correspond to Tag 802.1p value of the packet in input to the
Switch.
Table columns (802.1p OUTPUT Priority Remapping - 0÷7) correspond to Tag 802.1p value of the pack-
et in output from the Switch.
The active option indicates, for every priority of the packet in input to the Switch (802-1p INPUT...),
the relevant priority in output from the Switch (802.1p OUTPUT...).
3. In order to change a value, select in the table the option corresponding to the wished combination:
values of Tag 802.1p in input to the port - value of Tag 802.1p in output from the Switch.
WARNING Operation available and meaningful only if the parameter Current 802.1Q Setting has value:
• Secure (Service Provider Port).
• Secure (C_vid Filtering) with the corresponding Radio port in Secure and the transit of packets
is enabled (Port Based VLan).


The table Service Tag List allows managing the exceptions on the priority criteria used on port basis
and seen before for the single VID (S-VID or C-VID) according to the enabling of Provider modality.
Each row of the table corresponds to an exception. For every item, is pointed out in the column:
• S_Vid or C_Vid. VLAN identifier where exception is applied (S-VID: Service VLAN Identifier, C-
VID: Customer VLAN Identifier).
Header S_Vid is present if port is Provider, while C_Vid if the port is not Provider.
• Default Priority. Only for set VLAN (S-VID or C-VID): value used to define the output queue of
Radio port when the selected priority criterion is TAG Default (see parameter Priority Sel) and
value used as priority 802.1p added to untagged packets which enter in the considered LAN and
will exit tagged from the corresponding remote LAN port (0: lowest priority; 7: highest priority).
• Priority Sel. Only for set VLAN (S-VID or C-VID): priority criterion used to associate the packets,
in input from the LAN, to the output queues of the Radio port:
• TAG Default. The traffic will be sent on the output queues of Radio port according to the
default value set by the user.
• 802.1p. The traffic will be sent on the output queues of Radio port according to the value
of native 802.1p priority.
• TOS/DSCP. The traffic will be sent on the output queues of Radio port according to the
TOS/DSCP value present in native IP field.
• MPLS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the pri-
ority value present in native MPLS field.
be rewritten in the field 802.1p of C-VID. Option available only for C-VID.
be rewritten in the field 802.1p of S-VID. Option available only for S-VID.
3. To add an element to the list:

a. Press Add.
b. Set the S_Vid or C_Vid, Default Priority and Priority fields as described above.

4. To change an element of the list:
a. Double click on the box relevant to the Default Priority or Priority parameter you wish to change
and set the new value.
Pressing Revert changes cancels the change executed.
b. Press Apply Changes and confirm.
5. To delete an element from the list:

a. Select the element.
Verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue of
the LANs
2. Select the Queue Man. Radio To Lan tab.

The Egress Priority Policy parameter indicates the emptying algorithm of the output queues of the
LAN’s:
• 8421 WRR, a part (8 messages) of the queue with highest priority is empties, then a part of the
queue with lower priority (4 messages), then a part of the queue with further lower priority (2

messages), then a part of the queue with lowest priority (1 message) and so on restarting from
the queue with highest priority.
• Strict Priority, the queue with highest priority is completely emptied (sending of all the messag-
es) before sending a message of the queue with lower priority.
• Strict 3, the high priority queue 3 is completely emptied (sending of all the messages). The other
queues (2, 1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism.
• Strict 3 and 2, the high priority queue 3 and queue 2 are completely emptied. The other queues
(1, 0) are managed with a WRR 21 mechanism.
2. Select the 802.1Q Management tab.

The Default Vid parameter indicates the default VLAN Identifier value of the port.
The default VID of a port is used as VID in the field 802.1Q of the packets came from the port in subject
without Tag and destined to exit with Tag from any port of the Switch.
3. To change the parameter, type a numeric value between 2 and 4094.
Verify/modify the management of the 802.1Q field on the messages in input from the
LAN

The 802.1q Settings parameter indicates the management of the 802.1Q field on the messages in input
from the LAN:
• Disabled. The LAN does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input. They will be sent
only to the ports indicated in the Port Based VLAN area.
• Fallback. Packets are not discarded if the VLAN is not registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU).
If VID (VLAN Identifier) of incoming packet is registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the
ports belonging to the VLANs registered in VTU and included in VLAN on port basis.
If VID of incoming packet is NOT registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports includ-
ed in VLAN on port basis.
• Secure. VID must be contained in VTU and the input pot must be member of this VLAN, other-
wise the packet is discarded.
A packet can exit from the ports belonging to the VLAN registered in VTU and are included in
VLAN on port basis.
For each configuration (selection of the Disabled, Fallback or Secure option) the table of Port Based
VLAN must be ALWAYS configured even if the traffic management is executed only on Tag base (see
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the LAN can transit).
If you wish to obtain a bidirectional traffic routed according the Vlan table, the control of the Tag 802.1Q
(Fallback or Secure) must be activated on all the ports.

If the user assigns a not allowed value to the parameter, the system does not execute the command
and displays the following error message: “Command rejected: incompatible equipment status”.

WARNING Operation available and meaningful only if the parameter 802.1q Settings has value Disabled or
Fallback.

The Traffic Treatment parameter indicates the traffic transport modality (point-point or Bridge):
• Transparent Port to Port Transport. The traffic entering from a local LAN port will automatically
exit only from the equivalent remote LAN port, unless the single VLAN’s registered in VLAN Table
Unit (VTU) and routed by the user in different mode.
• Transparent Bridge Port Based. The traffic entering from a local LAN port will automatically exit
from all the remote LAN ports enabled by VLAN per port, unless the single VLAN’s registered in
VTU and routed by the user in different mode.

If the user assigns a not allowed value to the parameter, the system does not execute the command
and displays the following error message: “Command rejected: incompatible equipment status”.
WARNING Operation available and meaningful only if the parameter 802.1q Setting has Fallback value.

The parameter Provider indicates the insertion modality of Provider Tag in the packets in input from the
LAN in selective mode and not on port basis:
• Disable. Option disabled: the Provider Tag is not inserted in the packets in selective mode.
• C_Vid Based. Option enabled: the Provider Tag is inserted in the packets according to C-VID
(Customer VLAN Identifier) value.
• C_Vid + Internal Priority. Option enabled: the Provider Tag is inserted in the packets according
to C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) value and Internal Priority value.
Verify/overwrite the C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN and forwarded
to the Radio with a different VID
WARNING Operation available and meaningful only if the parameter 802.1q Settings has value Fallback.

The table Lan to Radio C_Vid Rewrite... indicates the correspondence between the C-VID value of the
packets in input from the LAN and the identifier used to replace C-VID in the packets forwarded to the
Radio port.
The name and the column of the table change according to the value set for the parameter Provider.
In detail, if for the parameter Provider the set value is:

• Disable, the tab contains the table Lan to Radio C_Vid Rewrite. In the column:
• Input C VID. Value C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) of the packets in input from the
LAN you wish to overwrite.
• Output C VID. New value of C-VID you wish to forward to Radio port.
To add a value to the list press Add. Set the Input C VID and Output C VID parameters with the
wished value. Press Apply and confirm.
To delete a value select the relevant row. Press Remove and confirm.
• C_Vid Based, the tab contains the table Lan to Radio C_Vid Rewrite & Selective QinQ. In the
column:
• Input C VID. C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN which you wish to add
S_TAG.
• Output C VID. New value of C-VID you wish to forward to Radio port. This value can be
equal to or different from the native C-VID incoming from LAN ports.
• Output S VID. New value of S-TAG added to the set C-VID value.
To add a value to the list press Add. Set the Input C VID, Output C VID and Output S VID pa-
rameters with the wished value. Press Apply and confirm.
• C_Vid + Internal Priority, the tab contains the table Lan to Radio C_Vid Rewrite & Selective QinQ.
In the column:
• Input C VID. C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN which you wish to add
S_TAG to.
• Internal Priority. Value of priority associated to the packets incoming from the considered
LAN port with the specific C-VID selected, which you wish to add a S-TAG to.
• Output S VID. New value of S-TAG added to set C-VID value and priority.
To add a value to the list press Add. Set the Input C VID, Internal Priority e Output S VID pa-
rameters with the wished value. Press Apply and confirm.
WARNING Operation available and meaningful only if the parameter 802.1q Settings has value Fallback or
Secure.
The table Port C_Vid displays the list of C-VIDs (Customer VLAN Identifier) registered in VLAN Table
Unit (VTU) and associated to the LAN. In the column:
• C_Vid. C-VID value registered in VTU.
• VLan Label. Possible name associated to the registered C-VID value.
• Frame Forwarding. Modality used to manage the registered C-VID.
Table available when the parameter 802.1q Settings has value Fallback or Secure (box Provider inac-
tive).
The table Port S_Vid displays the list of S-VIDs (Service VLAN Identifier) registered in VTU and associ-
ated to the LAN. In the column:
• S_Vid. S-VID value registered in VTU.
• VLan Label. Possible name associated to the registered S-VID value.
• Frame Forwarding. Modality used to manage the registered S-VID.
Table available when the parameter 802.1q Settings has value Secure (box Provider active).

WARNING Operation available and meaningful only if the parameter 802.1q Settings has value Secure.

The parameter Provider indicates the management of the LAN in Provider Mode.
Active box ( ) means that for the LAN the Provider mode (Double Tag active) is set; inactive box in-
dicates that for the LAN the Provider mode (Double Tag inactive) is not set.
3. To change the parameter, check or uncheck the relevant box
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the LAN can tran-
sit
2. Select the Port Based VLan tab.

The Port Based VLAN area indicates the enabling status of the ports through which can transit the mes-
sages in input from the LAN which the window refers to. For every single Ethernet port, if the set option
is:
• Disable, the packets, in input from the LAN which the window refers to, are not enabled to transit
from the specific internal or external port.
• Enable, the packets, in input from the LAN which the window refers to, are enabled to transit
from the specific internal or external port (bidirectional connection).
The box relevant to the LAN, which the contextual area refers to, is not displayed.

Enabling a port involves the automatic enabling of the corresponding port. For example, if you enable
the port LAN 1 in the Port A (Enh.) contextual area, the Port A is automatically enabled in the LAN 1
(Enh.) contextual area.
2. Select the LLF tab.

The LLF parameter indicates the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality:
• Disable. The LLF modality is disabled.
• Local. The LLF modality is enabled: the port is disabled in presence of radio alarms (BASE BAND
Link Loss Forwarding Alarm, RADIO Link Id. Alarm) or if the internal port is disabled.
Only if the Local option is active, the activation of the check-box:

• Rem. LAN-1, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the remote
LAN 1 (Enh.) port associated to it.
• Rem. LAN-2, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the remote
LAN 2 (Enh.) port associated to it.
3. To change the parameter, select the wished options.


The loop activation can compromise the transit of supervision (see Tab.8).

2. Select the Line Loop tab.
The Line Loop parameter displays the status of the loop on line side of the LAN:
• Enable. Loop on line side active.
• Disable. Loop on line side inactive.
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are activating the loop a message warns that you are executing a forcing and displays the
current setting of timeout.

The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the loop is inactive, independently from the previous setting.
Verify the status and the configuration of the laser (LAN)
WARNING Operation available only for LAN 1 (Enh.) whit optical interface.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.).

2. Select the Laser Control tab.
The tab displays the current status and the configuration parameters of the laser.
Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

In the Transmitter Control area the enabling status of the laser is pointed out:
• On. The laser is enabled for transmission.
• Off. The laser is not enabled for transmission.
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are disabling the laser (selection of the Off option), a message warns that you are executing
a forcing and displays the current setting of the timeout.

The laser disabling activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and switched off, the
laser is enabled to transmit independently from the previous setting.


The Mode parameter indicates the transmission mode of the laser:
• Disable. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the real pres-
ence of the optical signal.
• Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal: when the
signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the laser does not transmit.
In this last condition, the controller automatically turns the laser on for 2 seconds every x sec-
onds (value adjustable in Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote transmitter: if the signal
at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit, otherwise, after x seconds, the laser
will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on.
To change the Auto Restart Time interval set into the relevant box a value between 60 and 300
sec. (default 120 sec.). Select the Apply and confirm.
• Manual. The laser transmission is manually enabled by the operator.
• Test. The laser transmits for x seconds (operation of laser functioning status).
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are setting Disable, Manual or Test as transmission modality for the laser, a message warns
that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of the timeout.
The selection of a modality different from Auto activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the user turns off the
equipment and then turns it on again, without taking into any account the preceding setting, the trans-
mission mode of the laser is Auto.
3. Select the Manual option.

4. Press Apply.
A message warns that you are executing a forcing and shows the current setting of timeout.

The setting of the Manual modality, activates the MAN. OP alarm.

The laser transmits for 2 seconds and then stops itself.


3. Set, into the Test Time box, the number of seconds during which the user wants to turn on the laser.
To change the time interval set into the box a value between 1 and 100 sec. (default 90 sec.).
4. Select the Test option.
5. Press Apply.

The setting of the Test modality, activates the MAN. OP alarm.

The laser transmits for the number of seconds set into the Test Time box and then it stops itself.

LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.) contextual area
The contextual area contains the:

Interface tab. The tab displays the general configuration parameters of the LAN.
Input Filter Policing tab. The tab displays the modality to use to limit the traffic in input from LAN port.
Priority Management tab. The tab displays the configuration parameters of the LAN relevant to priority
management.
802.1Q Management tab. The tab displays the configuration parameters of the LAN relevant to VLAN
management.
Queue Man. Radio to Lan tab. The tab displays the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the
output queue of the LANs.
Port Based VLAN tab. The tab displays the ports through which can transit the messages in input from
the LAN which the window refers to.
LLF tab. The tab displays the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality.
Line Loop tab. The tab displays the status of the loop on line side of the LAN.
Laser Control tab. The tab displays the configuration of the LAN with optical interface.
Push-button:
Interface tab
The tab displays the general configuration parameters of the LAN.
Master/Slave. Operating modality of the line synchronism:

• Master. The line synchronism is generated starting from the local clock.
• Slave. The line synchronism is generated starting from the clock retrieved from the line
(Loop Time).
Parameter available and meaningful only for the ports with electrical interface for which the autonego-
tiation is active (box Speed/Duplex - value Auto) and the 1000Base-T configuration is active.
M/S Autoneg. Activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line synchronism:
• Enable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is
automatic.
• Disable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is
forced. In this case, the role defined in the Master/Slave box is used.
Parameter available and meaningful only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation
is active (box Speed/Duplex – value Auto) and the 1000Base-T configuration is active.
Rate Control. Enabling status of the port:

• Disable. The LAN is not enabled to the use.
• Full Rate. The LAN is enabled to the use of the max bit rate relevant to the port.
• ...Kb/...Mb. The LAN is enabled to the use with bit rate limited to the specific value.
Flow Control Full Dplx / Back Pressure Half Dplx. Activation status of the flow control of the port:
• Auto. The flow control is automatic (automatically activated or deactivated by the auto ne-
gotiation procedure).
Option available only if the auto negotiation is active for the port (Speed/Duplex box - Auto
option).
Cable Crossover. Inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines:

• MDI (NIC). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card mo-
dality).

• MDIX (switch). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch modality).
• Auto. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic modality.
Parameter available and meaningful only for ports with electrical interface for which the use of LAN is
enabled (box Rate Control – value Full Rate or ...Kb/...Mb).
Mac Learning. Enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table (MAC
Table):
• Enable. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the addresses in the
table takes place analysing only the field MAC Address and is registered in a single MAC Ta-
ble.
• Learn. on port basis. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the ad-
dresses in the table takes place associating the MAC Address to the segment of MAC Table
indicized by the Default VID value associated to the port which the traffic is income from.
Speed/Duplex. Activation status of the autonegotiation and, if the autonegotiation is deactivated, op-
erating modalities and transmission speed of the port.
For LAN 1 (Enh.) and LAN 2 (Enh.) with electrical interface, the following values are available:
• Full-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and
• Half-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and
• Half-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex
and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.
• Auto. The auto negotiation is enabled.
For LAN 1 (Enh.) with optical interface, the following values are available:
• Full-Duplex-1G. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and
the data transmission speed through the LAN is 1GMbit/s.
Speed. Data transmission speed.
Duplex. Transmission modality.
Port Role. Current status of the line synchronism.

Parameter available and meaningful only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation
is active (box Speed/Duplex – value Auto) and the 1000Base-T configuration is active.
Alarms. Status of the alarms relevant to the port. The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status
and severity:
Push-button:
Restart Autonegotiation. Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the LAN.
Related Topics
Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the
operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN
Verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line synchronism for
the LAN

The tab displays the modality to use to limit the traffic in input from LAN port.
Mode. Modality to use to limit the traffic in input from LAN port and forwarded to Radio port:
• Disable. Option disabled: the traffic in input is not limited according to specific criteria.
• UNI Port based. Option enabled: all the traffic in input is limited on port basis.
• EVC C_Vid Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the packets with C-
VID identifiers defined by the user and pointed out in the table below.
• COS C_Vid + Internal Priority Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for
the packets with C-VID values and priority defined by the user and pointed out in the table
below.
• EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the packets
with S-VID and C-VID values defined by the user and pointed out in the table below.
• COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Internal Priority Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only
for the packets with S-VID and C-VID values and priority defined by the user and pointed
out in the table below.
The table present in the tab will point out, according to the set modality, the criteria for the traffic limitation
defined by the user (Bandwidth Profile).
Every row of the table corresponds to one criterion. The configuration parameters (pointed out in the table
columns) of the criterion change depending on the setting of the parameter Mode. In detail, if the active
value is:
UNI Port Based the table contains the columns:

• CIR (Committed Information Rate). Transmission rate (expressed in Mbit/s) ensured in nor-
mal operating condition of the network (throughput).
• EIR (Excess Information Rate). Band exceeding that set by CIR.
• CBS (Committed Burst Size). Traffic burst which the network ensures to store.
• EBS (Excessive Burst Size). Quantity of data, besides CBS, the network can store.
• CF (Coupling Flag). Modality to control the traffic declared Yellow.
• Enabled. The average value, in the long period, of the allowed Yellow traffic has max-
imum limit CIR+EIR. This value is not fixed, but depends on the traffic declared
Green.
• Disabled. The average value, in the long period, of the allowed Yellow traffic has max-
imum limit EIR.
In both cases, the Burst Size of the allowed Yellow traffic has maximum value EBS.
EVC C_Vid Based the table contains the columns:

Based, but only for the traffic with identifier C-VID set by the user, and not on the whole
traffic incoming from LAN port.
COS C_Vid + Internal Priority Based the table contains the columns:
Based, but only for the traffic with identifier C-VID and 802.1p priority set by the user, and
not on the whole traffic incoming from LAN port.
EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based the table contains the columns:

Based, but only for the traffic with identifiers S-VID and C-VID set by the user, and not on
the whole traffic incoming from LAN port.
COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Internal Priority Based the table contains the columns:

Based, but only for the traffic with identifiers S-VID and C-VID and with 802.1p priority set
by the user, and not on the whole traffic incoming from LAN port.
Push-button:
Add. Add an element to the table.
Remove. Delete an element from the table.
Apply changes. Confirm the changes made to the elements of the table.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes made to the elements of the table and not confirmed yet.
Related Topics
Verify/modify the modality and the criteria used to limit the traffic in input from the LAN
The tab displays configuration parameters of the LAN relevant to the priority management.
Current 802.1Q Settings. Current status of the management modality of protocol 802.1Q:
• Disabled. The LAN does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input. They will be
sent only to the ports pointed out in the area Port Based VLAN.
• Fallback. The traffic in input from the port is subjected both to port based routing (Port Based
VLAN) and to VLAN Table Unit (VTU) based routing.
• Secure (C_vid Filtering). The traffic in input from the port is subjected only to the routing
defined by VTU.
• Secure (Service Provider Port). The traffic in input from the port can be only of type Provider
and will be subjected only to the routing defined by VTU.
Priority Selection. Priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input to the port, to the output
of the Radio Port:
If the parameter Current 802.1Q Settings has value:
• Disabled the following options are present:
• Port Default. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according
to the default value set by the user.
• Native TOS/DSCP. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port ac-
cording to the TOS/DSCP value present in the native IP field.
• Native MPLS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according
to the priority value present in native MPLS field.
• Fallback or Secure (C_vid Filtering) the following options are present:
• Native 802.1p (C_Vid). The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port
according to the value of native 802.1p priority.
Radio port according to the priority value present in native MPLS field and this value
will be rewritten in the field 802.1p of C-VID.
• Secure (Service Provider Port) the following options are present:
• Native 802.1p (C_Vid). The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port
according to the value of native 802.1p priority.

will be rewritten in the field 802.1p of C-VID.
will be rewritten in the field 802.1p of S-VID.
Default Internal Priority. Value used to define the output queue of the Radio port when the selected
priority criteria is Port Default (see parameter Priority Selection) and value used as priority 802.1p add-
ed to the untagged packets entering in the considered LAN and they will exit tagged from the corre-
sponding remote LAN port:
• 0. Lowest priority
• 7. Highest priority.
The tab, if the analysis of the priority 802.1p value is active (parameter Priority Selection set to the Native
802.1p (C_Vid) value), displays a table pointing out the mapping of priority 802.1p within Tag VLan (pri-
ority 802.1p present into a packet in input to a port can be remapped in output from the Switch with a
different priority value).
Table rows (802-1p INPUT Priority - 7÷0) correspond to Tag 802.1p value of the packet in output from the
Switch.
Table columns (802.1p OUTPUT Priority Remapping - 0÷7) correspond to Tag 802.1p value of the packet
in output from the Switch.
The active option indicates, for every priority of the packet in input to the Switch (802-1p INPUT...), the
relevant priority in output from the Switch (802.1p OUTPUT...).
If the parameter Current 802.1Q Setting has value Secure (Service Provider Port) or Secure (C_vid Filter-
ing) with the corresponding Radio port in Secure and the transit of packets is enabled (Port Based VLan),
the tab display the Service Tag List table. The table allows managing the exceptions on the priority cri-
teria used on port basis and seen before for the single VID (S-VID or C-VID) according to the enabling of
Provider modality.
Each row of the table corresponds to an exception. For every item, is pointed out in the column.
S_Vid or C_Vid. VLAN where exception is applied (S-VID: Service VLAN Identifier or C-VID: Customer
VLAN Identifier).
Header S_Vid is present if port is Provider, while C_Vid if the port is not Provider.
Default Priority. Only for set VLAN (S-VID or C-VID): value used to define the output queue of Radio
port when the selected priority criterion is TAG Default (see parameter Priority Sel) and value used as
priority 802.1p added to untagged packets which enter in the considered LAN and will exit tagged from
the corresponding remote LAN port (0: lowest priority; 7: highest priority).
Priority Sel. Only for set VLAN (S-VID or C-VID): priority criterion used to associate the packets, in
input from the LAN, to the output queues of the Radio port:
• TAG Default. The traffic will be sent on the output queues of Radio port according to the de-
fault value set by the user.
• 802.1p. The traffic will be sent on the output queues of Radio port according to the value of
native 802.1p priority.
• TOS/DSCP. The traffic will be sent on the output queues of Radio port according to the TOS/
DSCP value present in native IP field.
• MPLS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the priority
value present in native MPLS field.
• 802.1p (C_PCP) rewrite with MPLS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio
port according to the priority value present in native MPLS field and this value will be rewrit-
ten in the field 802.1p of C-VID. Option available only for C-VID.
• 802.1p (S_PCP) rewrite with MPLS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio
port according to the priority value present in native MPLS field and this value will be rewrit-
ten in the field 802.1p of S-VID. Option available only for S-VID.

In the Service Tag List table the push-button:
Apply changes. Confirm the changes made to the elements of the table.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes made to the elements of the table and not confirmed yet.
Related Topics
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LAN to the output
queue of the Radio port
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the LAN relevant to VLAN management.
Default Vid. Default VID value of the port.

The default VID of a port is used a S-VID in the field 802.1Q of the packets came from the port in sub-
ject without Tag and destined to exit with Tag from any port of the Switch.
802.1q Settings. Management of the 802.1Q field on the messages in input from the LAN:
• Disabled. The LAN does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input. They will be
sent only to the ports indicated in the Port Based VLAN area.
• Fallback. Packets are not discarded if the VLAN, which the packets belong to, is not regis-
tered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU).
If VID of incoming packet is registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports belong-
ing to the VLAN’s registered in VTU and included in VLAN on port basis.
If VID of incoming packet is NOT registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports
included in VLAN on port basis.
• Secure. VID must be contained in VTU and the input pot must be member of this VLAN, oth-
erwise the packet is discarded.
A packet can exit from the ports belonging to the VLAN registered in VTU and are included
in VLAN on port basis.
Traffic Treatment. Traffic transport modality (point-point or Bridge):

• Transparent Port to Port Transport. The traffic entering from a local LAN port will automati-
cally exit only from the equivalent remote LAN port, unless the single VLANs registered in
VTU and routed by the user in different mode.
• Transparent Bridge Port Based. The traffic entering from a local LAN port will automatically
exit from all the remote LAN ports enabled by VLAN per port, unless the single VLANs regis-
tered in VTU and routed by the user in different mode.
Parameter available and meaningful only if the parameter 802.1q Settings has value Disabled or Fall-
back.
Provider. Insertion modality of Provider Tag in the packets in input from the LAN in selective mode
and not on port basis:
• Disable. Option disabled: the Provider Tag is not inserted in the packets in selective mode.
• C_Vid Based. Option enabled: the Provider Tag is inserted in the packets according to C-VID
(Customer VLAN Identifier) value.
• C_Vid + Internal Priority. Option enabled: the Provider Tag is inserted in the packets accord-
ing to C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) value and Internal Priority value.
Parameter available and meaningful only if the parameter 802.1q Settings has value Fallback.
Provider. Active box ( ) means that for the LAN the Provider mode (Double Tag active) is set; inactive
box indicates that for the LAN the Provider mode (Double Tag inactive) is not set.
Parameter available and meaningful only if the parameter 802.1q Settings has value Secure.

Lan to Radio C_Vid Rewrite. Table of correspondence between the C-VID value of the packets in
input from the LAN and the identifier used to replace C-VID in the packets forwarded to the Radio port.
The column:
• Input C VID. C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) value of the packets in input from the LAN
you wish to overwrite.
• Output C VID. New value of C-VID you wish to forward to Radio port.
Push-button:
Add. Add a new value to the list.
Remove. Remove a value from the list.
Table available and meaningful only if the parameter 802.1q Settings has value Fallback and the pa-
rameter Provider has value Disable.
Lan to Radio C_Vid Rewrite & Selective QinQ. If the parameter Provider has value:
• Enabled C_Vid Based. Table indicates the correspondence between the C-VID value of the
packets in input from the LAN and the identifier (C-VID and S-VID) used to replace C-VID in
the packets forwarded to the Radio port.
The column:
• Input C VID. C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN which you wish to
add.
• Output C VID. New value of C-VID you wish to forward to Radio port. This value
can be equal to or different from the native C-VID incoming from LAN ports.
• Output S VID. New value of S-TAG added to the set C-VID value.
• C_Vid + Internal Priority. Table indicates the correspondence between the C-VID value and
priority 802.1p of the packets in input from the LAN and the S-TAG value added to the pack-
ets forwarded to the Radio port.
The column:
• Input C VID. C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN which you wish to
add S_TAG to.
• Internal Priority. Value of priority associated to the packets incoming from the
considered LAN port with the specific C-VID selected, which you wish to add a S-
TAG to.
• Output S VID. New value of S-TAG added to set C-VID value and priority.
Push-button:
Add. Add a new value to the list.
Remove. Remove a value from the list.
Table available and meaningful only if the parameter 802.1q Settings has value Fallback and the pa-
rameter Provider has value Enabled C_Vid Based or C_Vid + Internal Priority.
Port C_Vid. The table displays the list of C-VID’s (Customer VLAN Identifier) registered in VLAN Table
Unit (VTU) and associated to the LAN. In the column:
• C_Vid. C-VID value registered in VTU.
• VLan Label. Possible name associated to the registered C-VID value.
• Frame Forwarding. Modality used to manage the registered C-VID.
Push-button:
Show Table. Display the list of C-VID’s.
Table available when the parameter 802.1q Settings has value Fallback or Secure (parameter Provider
disabled).
Port S_Vid. The table displays the list of S-VID’s (Service VLAN Identifier) registered in VTU and as-
sociated to the LAN. In the column:
• S_Vid. S-VID value registered in VTU.
• VLan Label. Possible name associated to the registered S-VID value.
• Frame Forwarding. Modality used to manage the registered S-VID.
Push-button:
Show Table. Display the list of S-VID’s.
Table available when the parameter 802.1q Settings has value Secure (parameter Provider enabled).

Related Topics
Verify/modify the management of the 802.1Q field on the messages in input from the LAN
Verify/overwrite the C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN and forwarded to the Radio with
a different VID
The tab displays the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue of the LANs.
Egress Priority Policy. Emptying algorithm:

• 8421 WRR. A part (8 messages) of the queue with highest priority is empties, then a part of
the queue with lower priority (4 messages), then a part of the queue with further lower pri-
ority (2 messages), then a part of the queue with lowest priority (1 message) and so on re-
starting from the queue with highest priority.
• Strict Priority. The queue with highest priority is completely emptied (sending of all the mes-
sages) before sending a message of the queue with lower priority.
• Strict 3. The high priority queue 3 is completely emptied (sending of all the messages). The
other queues (2, 1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism.
• Strict 3 and 2. The high priority queue 3 and queue 2 are completely emptied. The other
queues (1, 0) are managed with a WRR 21 mechanism.
Related Topics
Verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue of the LANs
Port Based VLAN tab
The tab displays the ports through which can transit the messages in input from the LAN which the window
refers to.
LAN.../Port A. For each single Ethernet port, if the set option is:
• Disable, the packets, in input from the LAN which the window refers to, are not enabled to
transit through the specific internal or external port.
• Enable, the packets, in input from the LAN which the window refers to, are enabled to transit
through the specific internal or external port (bidirectional connection).
The box relevant to the LAN, which the contextual area refers to, is not displayed.
Related Topics
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the LAN can transit
LLF tab
The tab displays the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality.
LLF. Enabling status of the LLF modality:

• Disable. The LLF modality is disabled.
• Local. The LLF modality is enabled: the port is disabled in presence of radio alarms or if the
internal port is disabled.

Only if the Local option is active, the activation of the check-box:
• Rem. LAN-1, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the re-
mote LAN 1 (Enh.) port associated to it.
• Rem. LAN-2, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the re-
mote LAN 2 (Enh.) port associated to it.
Related Topics
Line Loop tab
The tab displays the status of the loop on line side of the LAN.
Line Loop. Status of the loop on line side of the LAN:

• Enable. Loop on line side active.
• Disable. Loop on line side inactive.
Related Topics
Laser Control tab
WARNING Tab available only for LAN 1 (Enh.) with optical interface.
The tab displays the configuration of the LAN with optical interface.
Transmitter Control. Enabling status of the laser:

• On. The laser is enabled for transmission.
• Off. The laser is not enabled for transmission.
<Box>. Current status of the laser:

• Status On / green box. The laser is on transmission.
• Status Off / gray box. The laser is not on transmission.
Module Type. Laser module type:

• optical-100baseFX. Laser module of type 100 Base FX (Fiber).
• optical-1000baseSX. Laser module of type 1000 Base SX (Short WaveLength).
• optical-1000baseLX. Laser module of type 1000 Base LX (Long WaveLength).
• Unknown. The laser module is not among those listed above (possible anomaly of the laser
module).
For more information relevant to laser module refer to IEEE standard 802.3.
Mode. Transmission mode of the laser. If active, the option:

• Disable. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the real
presence of the optical signal.
• Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal: when
the signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the laser does not
transmit.
In this last condition, the controller automatically turns the laser on for 2 seconds every x
seconds (value adjustable in Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote transmitter: if
the signal at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit, otherwise after x sec-
onds the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on.
• Manual. The laser transmission is manually enabled by the operator.
• Test. The laser transmits for x seconds (operation of test laser operation status).

Auto Restart Time. Time (expressed by means of seconds) waited by the equipment controller before
trying again the laser turning-on (when the transmission mode of the laser is Auto).
Test Time. Time (expressed in seconds) during which the equipment controller turns on the laser dur-
ing the testing operation.
Push-button:
Restart. Restart the laser.
Related Topics

Port A (Enh.)
WARNING Setting a specific management configuration introduces some restrictions on the setting of the
Ethernet Switch parameters (see Management configurations (more info), Tab.6).
The Port A (Enh.) command manages the Ethernet internal port.

STATUS AND COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS
Verify/modify the enabling status of the internal port

Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the internal port
PRIORITY PARAMETERS
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the internal port to the
output queue of the LAN ports
Verify/modify the value for Port Default
Verify/modify the mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the internal port
OUTPUT QUEUES PARAMETERS
Verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the internal port
Verify/modify the enabling status of the S_Gentle functionality of the internal port
Verify/modify the integration constant on the drop possibility in a RED context (internal port)
Verify/modify the configuration of the output queues of the internal port
VIRTUAL LAN PARAMETERS
Verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the internal port
Verify/modify the default VID value of the internal port
Verify/overwrite the C-VID value of the packets in input from the internal port and forwarded to a LAN
port, with a different C-VID
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the internal port
The selection of the command displays the Port A (Enh.) contextual area
1. Select Base Band > Port A (Enh.).

The Port parameter indicates the enabling status of the internal port:
• Disable. The internal port is not enabled to the use.
• Enable. The internal port is enabled to the use.

Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the inter-
nal port
WARNING The MAC-based routing functionality in the Ethernet Switch is available only if enabled this func-
tion.

The MAC Learning parameter indicates the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Ad-
dress in the specific table (MAC Table):
• Enable. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the addresses in the table
takes place analysing only the field MAC Address and is registered in a single MAC Table.
• Learn. on port basis. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the address-
es in the table takes place associating the MAC Address to the segment of MAC Table indicized
by the Default VID value associated to the port which the traffic is income from.
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the
internal port to the output queue of the LAN ports

2. Select the Priority Selection tab.
The Priority parameter indicates the priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input to the
internal port, to the output of the LAN ports:
• Port Default. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the LAN ports according to the de-
fault value set by the user on the Radio port.
• Native 802.1P. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the LAN ports according to the
value of native 802.1p priority in input to Radio port.
• Native TOS/DSCP. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the LAN ports according to the
TOS/DSCP value present in the native IP field in input to Radio port.

The Default Priority parameter indicates the value used to define the output queue of the LAN ports
when the selected priority criteria is Port Default (see parameter Priority) (0: lowest priority, 7: highest
priority).

Verify/modify the mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the inter-
nal port
WARNING Operation available and meaningful only if the analysis of the value of the priority 802.1p (pa-
rameter Priority set to the value Native 802.1P) is active.

The tab, if the analysis of the priority 802.1p value is active, displays a table pointing out the mapping
of priority 802.1p within Tag VLan (priority 802.1p present into a packet in input to a port can be rem-
apped in output from the Switch with a different priority value).
Table rows (802-1p INPUT Priority - 7÷0) correspond to Tag 802.1p value of the packet in input to the
Switch.
Table columns (802.1p OUTPUT Priority Remapping - 0÷7) correspond to Tag 802.1p value of the pack-
et in output from the Switch.
The active option indicates, for every priority of the packet in input to the Switch (802-1p INPUT...),
the relevant priority in output from the Switch (802.1p OUTPUT...).
3. In order to change a value, select in the table the option corresponding to the wished combination:
values of Tag 802.1p in input to the port - value of Tag 802.1p in output from the Switch.
2. Select the Queue Management Lan To Radio tab.

The Flow Control parameter indicates the activation status of the flow control of the internal port:

The S-gentle parameter indicates the enabling status of the S_Gentle functionality in Drop Type mo-
dality equal to RED (see Verify/modify the configuration of the output queues of the internal port):
• Disable. The S_Gentle functionality is inactive.
• Enable. The S_Gentle functionality is active.

Verify/modify the integration constant on the drop possibility in a RED context (in-
ternal port)

The parameter Exp. Weighting Constant indicates the integration constant on the drop possibility in a
RED context (see Verify/modify the configuration of the output queues of the internal port). The trend
of traffic before the moment a packet should be dropped affects the drop algorithm.
3. To change the parameter, set a value between 0 and 15.

The table, present in the tab, indicates the configuration parameters of the output queues of the Radio
port. In detail, the column:
• Queue. Output queues of the Radio port:
• 7. Output queue with 7 priority (high priority)
• 6. Output queue with 6 priority.
• 0. Output queue with 0 priority (low priority).
• Queue Length (Kbit). Length of output queue:
• 128. The considered queue is 128 Mbit in depth.
To change the parameter, select the relevant box and then the wished option. Press Apply and
confirm.
• Type. Management algorithm of the output queues of the Radio port:
• Strict Priority. The queue with highest priority is completely emptied (sending of all the
messages) before sending a message of the queue with lower priority.
• WFQ (Weighted Fair Queue). The output queue of WFQ type are managed in such a way
to ensure a mutual ratio of radio band equal to the value WFQ Weight set for each queue.
confirm.
• WFQ Weight. Theoretical value of WFQ Weight set by the user (minimum 1, maximum 100).
The parameter is meaningful and can be set/changed only if the value WFQ is present in the
Type field.
To change the parameter, select the relevant box and then set a value between 1 and 100. Press
Apply and confirm.
• Actual WFQ. Real value of WFQ Weight calculated by the firmware rounding the theoretical value
set by the user.

Parameter meaningful only if the value WFQ is set in the Type field and a value from 1 to 100
is set in the WFQ Weight field.
• Drop Type. Criterion used to remove (drop) the packets from the queue in case of full queue:
• Tail. When the queue is full, only the last packet is dropped.
• Queue. When the queue is full, all its content is dropped.
• Red. Mode Random Early Detection active. The packet drop mode follows the trend de-
fined by the curves set through the parameters S min (G), S max (G) and P max (G)
(traffic Green).
• WRed. Mode Weighted Random Early Detection active. The packet drop mode follows the
trend defined by the curves set by the user through the parameters S min (G), S max
(G) and P max (G) for the Green traffic and by S min (Y), S max (Y) and P max (Y) for
the Yellow traffic.
Value meaningful only if a value different from Disable is set for the parameter Mode (LAN
ports - tab Input Filter Policing).
confirm.
The colour of a packet (as reported in the technical specification MEF Bandwidth Profiles for
Ethernet Services) is used to identify the compliance level of the packet with respect to the band
profile associated to the service. Colour:
• Green. The frame is compliance with both the parameters CIR and CBS of the band profile
associated to the service (Frame CIR-conformant).
• Yellow. The frame is not compliance with the parameters CIR and CBS, but is compliance
with the parameters EIR and EBS of the band profile associated to the service (Frame
EIR-conformant).
The association of colour Green and Yellow applied to the traffic incoming from the LAN port from
module Input Filter Policing (if active) is implemented with the following criterion:
• All the traffic marked CIR/CBS is considered Green.
• All the traffic marked EIR/EBS is considered Yellow.
• Green Tokens. Drop profile for the Green traffic:
• Profile 1. First drop profile set for the Green traffic. Fields S min (G): 30, S max (G): 60,
S gentle (G): 90 and P max (G): 10.
• Profile 2. Second drop profile set for the Green traffic. Fields S min (G): 20, S max (G):
40, S gentle (G): 80 and P max (G): 10.
• Custom. Drop profile defined by the user for the Green traffic. Fields S min (G), S max
(G), S gentle (G) and P max (G) which can be set by the user.
The parameter is meaningful and can be set/modified only if the value Red or WRed is present
in the Drop Type field.
confirm.
• Yellow Tokens. Drop profile for the Yellow traffic:
• Profile 1. First drop profile set for the Yellow traffic. Fields S min (Y): 30, S max (Y): 60,
S gentle (Y): 90 and P max (Y): 10.
• Profile 2. Second drop profile set for the Yellow traffic. Fields S min (Y): 20, S max (Y):
40, S gentle (Y): 80 and P max (Y): 10.
• Custom. Drop profile defined by the user for the Yellow traffic. Fields S min (Y), S max
(Y), S gentle (Y) and P max (Y) which can be set by the user.
The parameter is meaningful and can be set/modified only if the value WRed is present in the
Drop Type field.
confirm.
• S min (G). Minimum threshold of queue filling (percentage) under which the drop probability is
zero.
Parameter meaningful only if the value Red or WRed is present in the Drop Type field. Moreover,
it can be set/changed only if the value Custom is present in the Green Tokens field.
To change the parameter, select the relevant box and then set a value between 0 and 100; the
value must be lower than the one already present in the S max (G) field. Press Apply and con-
firm.
• S max (G). Maximum threshold of queue filling (percentage) beyond which the drop probability
is 100% with functionality S_Gentle disabled.

Parameter meaningful only if the value Red or WRed is present in the Drop Type field and the
value Disable in the S-gentle field. Moreover, it can be set/modified only if the value Custom is
present in the Green Tokens field.
To change the parameter, select the relevant box and then insert a value between 0 and 100;
the value must be greater than the one already present in the S min (G) field. Press Apply and
confirm.
• S gentle (G). Maximum threshold of queue filling (percentage) beyond which the drop probabil-
ity is 100% with functionality S_Gentle enabled.
Parameter meaningful only if the value Red or WRed is present in the Drop Type field and the
value Enable in the S-gentle field. Moreover, it can be set/modified only if the value Custom is
present in the Green Tokens field.
the value must be greater than the one already present in the S max (G) field. Press Apply and
confirm.
• P max (G). Drop probability in correspondence of S max.
Parameter meaningful only if the value Red or WRed is present in the Drop Type field. Moreover,
it can be set/modified only if the value Custom is present in the Green Tokens field.
To change the parameter, select the relevant box and then insert a value between 0 and 100.
Press Apply and confirm.
• S min (Y). Minimum threshold of queue filling (percentage) under which the drop probability is
zero.
Parameter meaningful only if the value WRed is present in the Drop Type field. Moreover, it can
be set/changed only if the value Custom is present in the Yellow Tokens field.
To change the parameter, select the relevant box and then set a value between 0 and 100; the
value must be lower than the one already present in the S max (Y) field. Press Apply and con-
firm.
• S max (Y). Maximum threshold of queue filling (percentage) beyond which the drop probability
is 100% with functionality S_Gentle disabled.
Parameter meaningful only if the value WRed is present in the Drop Type field and the value
Disable in the S-gentle field. Moreover, it can be set/modified only if the value Custom is present
in the Yellow Tokens field.
the value must be greater than the one already present in the S min (Y) field. Press Apply and
confirm.
• S gentle (Y). Maximum threshold of queue filling (percentage) beyond which the drop probability
is 100% with functionality S_Gentle enabled.
Parameter meaningful only if the value WRed is present in the Drop Type field and the value
Enable in the S-gentle field. Moreover, it can be set/modified only if the value Custom is present
in the Yellow Tokens field.
the value must be greater than the one already present in the S max (Y) field. Press Apply and
confirm.
• P max (Y). Drop probability in correspondence of S max.
Parameter meaningful only if the value WRed is present in the Drop Type field. Moreover, it can
be set/modified only if the value Custom is present in the Yellow Tokens field.
To change the parameter, select the relevant box and then insert a value between 0 and 100.
Press Apply and confirm.
Press View RED Curve to display the curve of RED (Random Early Detection) algorithm.
Verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the internal
port
WARNING In ALFOplus equipment, the option Fallback set for the internal port (Radio port) automatically
inserts, in every packets in output from the Radio port, a proprietary Tag which identifies the source LAN
port, so that all the advanced operation foreseen for ALFOplus can be executed in selective mode.
The considered Tag will be automatically removed by the corresponding remote Radio port.

The proprietary Tag which identifies the LAN port is not inserted if the modality Secure is set, because the
traffic source is implicitly known observing the VLAN’s enabled in VTU Table.

The Ingress Filtering Check parameter indicates, if active, the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages
in input from the port:
• Fallback (Provider Enable). Packets are not discarded if the VLAN, which the packets belong to,
is not registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU).
If VID of incoming packet is registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports belonging
to the VLAN’s registered in VTU and included in VLAN on port basis.
If VID of incoming packet is NOT registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports includ-
ed in VLAN on port basis.
• Secure (Provider Disable). VID must be contained in VLAN Table Unit (VTU) and the input pot
must be member of this VLAN, otherwise the packet is discarded.
A packet can exit from the ports belonging to the VLAN registered in VTU and are included in
VLAN on port basis.
For each configuration (selection of the value Fallback and Secure) the table of Port Based VLAN must
be ALWAYS configured even if the traffic management is executed only on Tag base (see Verify/modify
the ports through which the messages in input from the internal port).
If you wish to obtain a bidirectional traffic routed according the Vlan table, the control of the Tag 802.1Q
(Fallback or Secure) must be activated on all the ports.

The Default Vid parameter indicates the default VID value of the port.
3. To change the parameter, type a numeric value between 2 and 4094.
Verify/overwrite the C-VID value of the packets in input from the internal port and
forwarded to a LAN port, with a different C-VID

The table C-VID/S-VID Rewrite indicates the correspondence between the C-VID value of the packets
in input from the internal port and the identifier used to replace C-VID in the packets forwarded to a
LAN port.
Every row of the table corresponds to a rule for which is pointed out in the column:
• Input C VID. Identifier C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) you wish to overwrite.
• Output C VID. New value of C-VID you wish to forward to LAN port.
• Output Lan (S_Vid). LAN port which you wish to forward the new C-VID to.

3. To add an element to the list:
a. Press Add.
b. Set the Input C_Vid, Output C VID and Output Lan (S_Vid) filed as described above.

4. To delete an element from the list:
a. Select the element.

2. Select the Port Based VLan tab.

The tab displays the enabling status of the ports through which can transit the messages in input from
the internal port which the window refers to. For every LAN, if the set option is:
• Disable, the packets, in input from the internal port, are not enabled to transit from the specific
LAN.
• Enable, the packets, in input from the internal port, are enabled to transit from the specific LAN
(bidirectional connection).

Enabling a port involves the automatic enabling of the corresponding port. For example, if you enable
the port LAN 1 in the Port A (Enh.) contextual area, the Port A is automatically enabled in the LAN 1
(Enh.) contextual area.

Port A (Enh.) contextual area
The contextual area contains the:

Interface tab. The tab displays the general configuration parameters of the internal port.
Priority Selection tab. The tab displays the configuration parameters of the internal port relevant to pri-
ority management.
Queue Management Lan To Radio tab. The tab displays the management of the output queues of the
Radio port.
802.1Q Management tab. The tab displays the configuration parameters of the internal port relevant
to VLAN management.
Port Based VLan tab. The tab displays the ports through which can transit the messages in input from
the internal port which the window refers to.
Push-button:
Interface tab
The tab displays the general configuration parameters of the internal port.
Port. Enabling status of the port:

• Disable. The internal port is not enabled to the use.
• Enable. The internal port is enabled.
Mac Learning. Enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table (MAC
Table):
• Enable. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the addresses in the
table takes place analysing only the field MAC Address and is registered in a single MAC Ta-
ble.
• Learn. on port basis. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the ad-
dresses in the table takes place associating the MAC Address to the segment of MAC Table
indicized by the Default VID value associated to the port which the traffic is income from.
Related Topics
Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the internal port
Priority Selection tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the LAN relevant to priority management.
Priority. Priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input to the internal port, to the output of
the LAN ports:
• Port Default. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the LAN ports according to the
default value set by the user on the Radio port.
• Native 802.1P. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the LAN ports according to the
value of native 802.1p priority in input to Radio port.
• Native TOS/DSCP. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the LAN ports according to
the TOS/DSCP value present in the native IP field in input to Radio port.

Default Priority. Value used to define the output queue of the LAN ports when the selected priority
criteria is Port Default (see parameter Priority):
• 0. Lowest priority
• 7. Highest priority.
The tab, if the analysis of the priority 802.1p value is active (parameter Priority set to value Native 802.1P),
displays a table pointing out the mapping of priority 802.1p within Tag VLan (priority 802.1p present into
a packet in input to a port can be remapped in output from the Switch with a different priority value).
Table rows (802-1p INPUT Priority - 7÷0) correspond to Tag 802.1p value of the packet in output from the
Switch.
Table columns (802.1p OUTPUT Priority Remapping - 0÷7) correspond to Tag 802.1p value of the packet
in output from the Switch.
The active option indicates, for every priority of the packet in input to the Switch (802-1p INPUT...), the
relevant priority in output from the Switch (802.1p OUTPUT...).
Related Topics
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the internal port to the
output queue of the LAN ports
Verify/modify the mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the internal port
Queue Management Lan To Radio tab
The tab displays the management of the output queues of the Radio port.
Flow Control. Activation status of the flow control of the internal port:
S-gentle. Enabling status of the S_Gentle functionality in Drop Type modality equal to RED:
• Disable. The S_Gentle functionality is inactive.
• Enable. The S_Gentle functionality is active.
Exp. Weighting Constant. Integration constant on the drop possibility in a RED context (the trend of
traffic before the moment a packet should be dropped affects the drop algorithm).
Queue. Output queues of the Radio port:

• 7. Output queue with 7 priority (high priority)
• 0. Output queue with 0 priority (low priority).
Queue Length (Kbit). Length of output queue:
Type. Management algorithm of the output queues of the Radio port:

• Strict Priority. The queue with highest priority is completely emptied (sending of all the mes-
sages) before sending a message of the queue with lower priority.

• WFQ (Weighted Fair Queue). The output queue of WFQ type are managed in such a way to
ensure a mutual ratio of radio band equal to the value WFQ Weight set for each queue.
WFQ Weight. Theoretical value of WFQ Weight set by the user (minimum 1, maximum 100).
Actual WFQ. Real value of WFQ Weight calculated by the firmware rounding the theoretical value set
by the user.
Drop Type. Criterion used to remove (drop) the packets from the queue in case of full queue:
• Tail. When the queue is full, only the last packet is dropped.
• Queue. When the queue is full, all its content is dropped.
• Red. Mode Random Early Detection active. The packet drop mode follows the trend defined
by the curves set through the parameters S min (G), S max (G) and P max (G) (traffic
Green).
• WRed. Mode Weighted Random Early Detection active. The packet drop mode follows the
trend defined by the curves set by the user through the parameters S min (G), S max (G)
and P max (G) for the Green traffic and by S min (Y), S max (Y) and P max (Y) for the Yellow
traffic.
Green Tokens. Drop profile for the Green traffic:

• Profile 1. First drop profile set for the Green traffic. Fields S min (G): 30, S max (G): 60, S
gentle (G): 90 and P max (G): 10.
• Profile 2. Second drop profile set for the Green traffic. Fields S min (G): 20, S max (G): 40,
S gentle (G): 80 and P max (G): 10.
• Custom. Drop profile defined by the user for the Green traffic. Fields S min (G), S max (G),
S gentle (G) and P max (G) which can be set by the user.
Yellow Tokens. Drop profile for the Yellow traffic:

• Profile 1. First drop profile set for the Yellow traffic. Fields S min (Y): 30, S max (Y): 60, S
gentle (Y): 90 and P max (Y): 10.
• Profile 2. Second drop profile set for the Yellow traffic. Fields S min (Y): 20, S max (Y): 40,
S gentle (Y): 80 and P max (Y): 10.
• Custom. Drop profile defined by the user for the Yellow traffic. Fields S min (Y), S max (Y),
S gentle (Y) and P max (Y) which can be set by the user.
S min (G). Minimum threshold of queue filling (percentage) under which the drop probability is zero.
S max (G). Maximum threshold of queue filling (percentage) beyond which the drop probability is
100% with functionality S_Gentle disabled.
S gentle (G). Maximum threshold of queue filling (percentage) beyond which the drop probability is
100% with functionality S_Gentle enabled.
P max (G). Drop probability in correspondence of S max.

S min (Y). Minimum threshold of queue filling (percentage) under which the drop probability is zero.
S max (Y). Maximum threshold of queue filling (percentage) beyond which the drop probability is
100% with functionality S_Gentle disabled.
S gentle (Y). Maximum threshold of queue filling (percentage) beyond which the drop probability is
100% with functionality S_Gentle enabled.
P max (Y). Drop probability in correspondence of S max.
Push-button:
View RED Curve. Display the curve of RED (Random Early Detection) algorithm.
Related Topics
Verify/modify the integration constant on the drop possibility in a RED context (internal port)

The tab displays the configuration parameters of the internal port relevant to VLAN management
Ingress Filtering Check. Control status of Tag Vlan ID on the messages in input from the port:
• Fallback (Provider Enable). Packets are not discarded if the VLAN, which the packets belong
to, is not registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU).
If VID of incoming packet is registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports belong-
ing to the VLAN’s registered in VTU and included in VLAN on port basis.
If VID of incoming packet is NOT registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports
included in VLAN on port basis.
• Secure (Provider Disable). VID must be contained in VLAN Table Unit (VTU) and the input
pot must be member of this VLAN, otherwise the packet is discarded.
A packet can exit from the ports belonging to the VLAN registered in VTU and are included
in VLAN on port basis.
Default Vid. Default VID value of the port.

C-VID/S-VID Rewrite. Table of correspondence between the C-VID value of the packets in input from
the internal port and the identifier used to replace C-VID in the packets forwarded to a LAN port.
Every row of the table corresponds to a rule for which is pointed out in the column:
• Input C VID. Identifier C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) you wish to overwrite.
• Output C VID. New value of C-VID you wish to forward to LAN port.
• Output Lan (S_Vid). LAN port which you wish to forward the new C-VID to.
In the C-VID/S-VID Rewrite table the push-button:

Related Topics
Verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the internal port
Verify/overwrite the C-VID value of the packets in input from the internal port and forwarded to a LAN
port, with a different C-VID
Port Based VLan tab
The tab displays the ports through which can transit the messages in input from the internal port which
the window refers to.
LAN.... For each LAN, if the set option is:

• Disable, the packets, in input from the internal port which the window refers to, are not en-
abled to transit through the specific external port.
• Enable, the packets, in input from the internal port, are enabled to transit through the spe-
cific external (bidirectional connection).
Related Topics

RADIO BRANCH
The Radio Branch command manages the radio parameters.

Verify/modify the duplex frequency (Dplx Freq)
Verify/modify the frequency which the equipment transmitter is tuned on (Tx Freq)
Verify/modify the frequency in reception (Rx Freq)
Verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier (Carrier Only)
Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter (Tx Transmitter)
Verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx) (Measurements Resolutions)
Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx) (Measurements Resolutions)
Verify/modify ATPC operating status (Reference Modulation Tx Power Control)
Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter (Max Ptx)
Verify/modify the ATPC regulation range (ATPC Regulation)
Set the transmission power to the minimum value (Tx Power Reduction)
Verify/modify the thresholds of ATPC device (Upper Modulation ATPC Thresholds on Local PRx)
Display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/reception for every ACM
profile
The selection of the command displays the Radio Branch contextual area.
Verify/modify the duplex frequency

WARNING Operation not available for the 17Ghz radio.
1. Select Radio Branch.

The Dplx Freq parameter indicates the duplex frequency (MHz) of the equipped radio.
The displayed value is always positive, independently from the position of the transmission frequency
with respect to the receiving frequency.
Verify/modify the frequency which the equipment transmitter is tuned on

WARNING Setting the parameter does NOT automatically modify even the RF frequency of remote equip-
ment.
Before setting the transmission frequency of the equipment, set the duplex frequency value.

The Tx Freq parameter indicates the transmission frequency of the equipment.
2. To change the parameter, it is possible to:
• Set in the Tx Freq box the wished frequency value using the fine tuning step (typically 250 KHz).
• Press Freq. Table to display the table of the preferential frequencies (channelling file). Select
the wished value and press Ok. If this value was not present in the table, the radio can be how-
ever tuned with fine tuning.

Push-button available only if the channelling file has been previously loaded on the equipment.
In case of fine-step file (less than 1 MHz), the frequency table does not contain any value to
avoid reading not meaningful values.
Verify/modify the frequency in reception

WARNING Only for the 17Ghz radio, the frequency in reception can be set independently from transmission
frequency.

The Rx Freq parameter indicates the transmission frequency of the equipment.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished frequency value from menu Rx Freq.
Verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier

User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read Only. Modify: Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Deactivating the modulation is a maintenance operation (MAN. OP).

Before deactivating the modulation, configure the transmitter power to the minimum value.

The Carrier Only parameter indicates the modulation status of the RF carrier:
• On. The carrier is not modulated.
• Off. The carrier is modulated.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are deactivating the modulation (selection of the On option) a message warns that you are
executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.
The modulation deactivation of the carrier activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched
off and, then, switched on, the modulation is active independently from the previous setting.
Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter

User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read Only. Modify: Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Switching the transmitter off is a maintenance operation (MAN. OP).

The permanent switch-off of the transmitter (option Permanent Off) is NOT a maintenance operation, so
the selection of this value is not subjected to the Timeout of MAN OP and the setting is not lost after a
controller restart.

The Tx Transmitter parameter indicates the operation of the transmitter:
• On. The transmitter is turned on.
• Off. The transmitter is turned off.
• Permanent Off. The transmitter is turned off in permanent mode.

3. Press Apply.
Only if you are switching off the transmitter (selection of the Off option) a message warns that you are
executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.
The turning off of the transmitter activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and,
then, switched on, the transmitter is on, independently from the previous setting.
Verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx)


The Prx: <current value> dB parameter indicates the resolution used to communicate the changes of
the power received by the equipment (Prx) to a possible external management program (trap Prx
change).
2. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the wished value.
Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx)


The Ptx: <current value> dB parameter indicates the resolution used to communicate the changes of
the power transmitted by the equipment (Ptx) to a possible external management program (trap Ptx
change).
Verify/modify ATPC operating status

2. Select the Powers tab.

The Reference Modulation Tx Power Control area indicates ATPC operating status:
• Manual. The ATPC device is in manual functioning mode (ATPC function disable).
In this condition, it is possible to adjust the maximum output power (Max Ptx cursor).
• Automatic. The ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode.
In this condition, the transmitted power is automatically adjusted according to the level of the
received signal.
The thresholds of ATPC device can be configured (see Verify/modify the thresholds of ATPC de-
vice). Then, the maximum output power can be adjusted (see Verify/modify the maximum out-
put power value at the transmitter).

Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter

The Max Ptx: <current value> dB parameter indicates the maximum output power value at the trans-
mitter (Ptx nominal value).

Verify/modify the ATPC regulation range

WARNING Operation available only if the ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode (Reference Modu-
lation Tx Power Control parameter - Automatic value).

The ATPC Regulation: <current value> dB parameter indicates the range for the regulation of ATPC
(expressed in dB) with respect to the current value of maximum Tx output, that is intended as the upper
limit of the range.

Set the transmission power to the minimum value

WARNING Operation available only for 17Ghz radio, when the reception frequency and the transmission
frequency can be set independently.
The Tx Power Reduction function allows to set the value of the radio transmission power to the minimum
value.
3. Press Tx Power Reduction and confirm.
Verify/modify the thresholds of ATPC device


In Upper Modulation ATPC Thresholds on Local PRx area, the ATPC thresholds are pointed out:
• High: <current value> dBm. Threshold of ATPC device to decrease the transmitted power when
the received field from the local equipment is equal to or higher than the set threshold value.
• Low: <current value> dBm. Threshold of ATPC device to increase the transmitted power when
the received field from the local equipment is equal to or lower than the set threshold value.

3. To change the threshold move the High and/or Low cursor to the wished value.
Display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/

reception for every ACM profile

In the Current ATPC Power area the table resuming the power in transmission/reception for every ACM
profile is displayed.
Every table row corresponds to a profile. For every profile is displayed in the column:
• Active Modulation. ACM profile
• Tx Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in output from the transmitter
• Rx Power. Range of received field for the regulation of the power of the remote transmitter.
Press Refresh to update the table.

Radio Branch contextual area
In the Radio Branch... contextual area is present the:

Settings tab. The tab displays the radio parameters (power resolution, transmitter operating status and
carrier modulation).
Powers tab. The tab displays the radio parameters (ATPC).
Push-button:
Settings tab
The tab displays the radio parameters (measurements resolution, transmitter operating status and carrier
modulation).
Tx Freq. Frequency of the radio transmission. The wording HW Fail indicates a hardware problem.
Dplx Freq. Frequency of duplex.
Rx Freq. Frequency of the radio in reception. Only for the 17 GHz radio, the reception frequency of the
radio can be set independently from the transmission frequency.
Measurements Resolution. Resolution of the power received (Prx) and transmitted (Ptx):
• Ptx. Resolution used to communicate the changes of the power transmitted by the equip-
ment (Ptx) to a possible external management program (trap Ptx change).
For instance, if the operator sets a resolution of 2 dB and the last communicated Ptx value
corresponds to 10 dBm, the equipment will communicate to the program the changing of the
transmitted power when the Ptx gets a value < 8 or > 12.
• Prx. Resolution used to communicate the changes of the power received by the equipment
(Prx) to a possible external management program (trap Prx change).
For instance, if the operator sets a resolution of 2 dB and the last communicated PRx value
corresponds to -70 dBm, the equipment will communicate to the program the changing of
the transmitted power when the PRx gets a value <-72 or > -68.
Tx Transmitter. Operating status of the transmitter:

• On. The transmitter is turned on.
• Off. The transmitter is turned off.
• Permanent Off. The transmitter is turned off in permanent mode.
Carrier Only. Modulation status of the RF carrier:

• On. The carrier is not modulated.
• Off. The carrier is modulated.
Push-button:
Freq. Table. Display the table of the preferential frequencies.
Related Topics
Verify/modify the frequency which the equipment transmitter is tuned on (Tx Freq)
Verify/modify the frequency in reception (Rx Freq)
Verify/modify the duplex frequency (Dplx Freq)
Verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier (Carrier Only)
Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter (Tx Transmitter)
Verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx) (Measurements Resolutions)
Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx) (Measurements Resolutions)

Powers tab
The tab displays the radio parameters (ATPC).
Reference Modulation Tx Power Control. Operating status of the ATPC device:

• Manual. The ATPC device is in manual functioning mode (ATPC function disable).
• Automatic. The ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode.
Max Ptx <current value> dBm. Maximum output power value at the transmitter. The parameter af-
fects the ATPC device both if this is excluded or active.
ATPC Regulation <current value> dB. Range of the ATPC regulation (expressed in dB) with respect
to the current value of maximum Tx output, that is intended as the upper limit of the range.
Parameter available only if the ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode (Reference Modulation Tx
Power Control parameter - Automatic value).
Upper Modulation ATPC Thresholds on Local PRx. ATPC thresholds:

• High: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to decrease the transmitted pow-
er when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or higher than the set thresh-
old value
• Low: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to increase the transmitted power
when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or lower than the set threshold
value.
Current ATPC Power. The table resuming the power in transmission/reception for every ACM profile.
Every table row corresponds to a profile. For every profile is displayed in the column:
• Active Modulation. ACM profile.
• Tx Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in output from the transmitter
• Rx Power. Range of received field for the regulation of the power of the remote transmitter.
Push-button:
Tx Power reduction. Set the value of the radio transmission power to the minimum value.
Refresh. Update the table.
Related Topics
Verify/modify ATPC operating status (Reference Modulation Tx Power Control)
Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter (Max Ptx)
Verify/modify the ATPC regulation range (ATPC Regulation)
Set the transmission power to the minimum value (Tx Power Reduction)
Verify/modify the thresholds of ATPC device (Upper Modulation ATPC Thresholds on Local PRx)

MAINTENANCE
Lan Statistics. It manages the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports, displaying all the counters of
packets/bytes in input/output, subdivided by single port.
Lan Stat. Summary. It manages the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports, displaying, at the same
time, the main counters of packets/bytes in input/output for each single port.
Advanced Stat. Mon. It manages the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports, displaying, at the same
time, the main counters of packets/bytes in input/output for each single port. The trend of the traffic
can be filtered according to specific user-defined criteria.
RMon. It manages the statistic counters of the Ethernet ports of the equipment.
S/N Meas. It displays the measure of the signal/noise ratio (S/N).
Radio BER. It manages the measure of Radio BER value.
Radio Loop. It manages the radio loops.

Lan Statistics
The Lan Statistics command manages the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports displaying all the
counters of packets/bytes in input/output, subdivided by single port.
Verify the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output from the Ethernet ports subdivided by each
port
Reset the counters’ results
The selection of the command displays the Lan Statistics contextual area
Verify the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output from the Ethernet ports
subdivided by each port
1. Select Maintenance > Lan Statistics.

The Lan Statistics contextual area displays the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports, displaying all
the counters of packets/bytes in input/output, subdivided by single port.
1. Select Maintenance > Lan Statistics.
2. Press Reset and confirm.

All the counters of all the Ethernet ports are set to zero.

Lan Statistics contextual area
The contextual area shows the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports, displaying all the counters of pack-
ets/bytes in input/output, subdivided by single port.
It is possible to display only the counters of a single port at a time: the port is pointed out in the box on
left top.
To display the counters of a different Ethernet port, set the wished port in the box.
Below the selected port, the list of the relevant counters is displayed with the corresponding value.
The value of the each counter refers to the moment when the relevant port is selected or the context is
updated. To update the data, press Refresh.
Notes relevant to the counters

The depth of the events stored by each single counter is equal to 2E32.
The counters are in compliance with the specification RFC 2819.
The Total Byte Received counter, differently from what specified in RFC 2819, does not include the
bytes belonging to packets of sizes greater than the Max Packet Size.
Counters list
Dropped Frame (or Event). Total number of events (frames) in which packets were dropped by the
probe due to lack of resources. This value is not necessarily the absolute number of discarded packets,
as it represents only the number of times that this condition occurred after the exhaustion of the mem-
ory resources; the packets can be discarded also for other causes.
Total Byte Received. Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the
network. This value includes 4 FCS octets.
Total Frames Received. Total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and mul-
ticast packets) received.
Broadcast Frames Received. Total number of good packets received that were directed to the broad-
cast address. This does not include multicast packets.
Multicast Frames Received. Total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast
address. This number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.
CRC Align Errors. Total number of packets received that had a length of between 64 and n (parameter
Max Packet Size, it can be set to 1522 or 2048) octets with bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) and an
integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment
Error).
Undersize Frames. Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long and were
otherwise well formed.
Oversize Frames. Total number of packets received that were longer than n (parameter Max Packet
Size, it can be set to 1522 or 2048) octets and were otherwise well formed.
Fragments. Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length and had either
a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a
non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Jabbers. Total number of packets received that were longer than n (parameter Max Packet Size, it can
be set to 1522 or 2048) octets, and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral
number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Collisions. The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this EthLannet segment.
Frames 64 Oct. [Sent+Rec.]. Total number of packets (including bad packets) received and trans-
mitted that were 64 octets in length.
Frames 65 to 127 Oct. [Sent+Rec.]. Total number of packets (including bad packets) received and
transmitted that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive.

Frames 512 to 1023 Oct. [Sent+Rec.]. Total number of packets (including bad packets) received
and transmitted that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive.
Frames 1024 to max pck size [Sent+Rec.]. Total number of transmitted and received packets with
a length greater than 1024 octets (incorrect packets included).
Late Collisions. Evaluation relevant to the total number of collisions detected in this EthLannet seg-
ment, after the transmission of more than 512 bits from the beginning of TXEnable.
Valid Bytes Received. Total number of received bytes relevant to correct packets. This counter is in-
creased once for every data octet of good packets (Unicast + Multicast + Broadcast) received.
Bytes Sent. Number of transmitted bytes. This counter is increased once for every data octet of a
transmitted good packet.
Valid Frames Received. Number of received correct frames. This counter is increased once for every
good packet (Unicast + Multicast + Broadcast) received.
Frames Sent. Number of transmitted frames. This counter is increased once for every transmitted
good packet.
Out Multicast Frames. Number of Multicast frames sent. This counter does not include Broadcast
packets.
Out Broadcast Frames. Number of Broadcast frames sent.
Out Unicast Frames. Number of Unicast frames sent. This is given by: Frames Sent - Out Multicast
Frames - Out Broadcast Frames.
In Pause Frames. Number of good Flow Control frames received.
Out Pause Frame. Number of Flow Control frames sent.
Push-button:
Refresh. Update the counters’ results.
Reset. Reset the counters’ results.

Lan Stat. Summary
The Lan Stat. Summary command manages the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports displaying, at
the same time, the main counters of packets/bytes in input/output for every port.
Verify the summary of the main counters of the Ethernet ports
The selection of the command displays the Lan Stat. Summary contextual area
Verify the summary of the main counters of the Ethernet ports
1. Select Maintenance > Lan Stat. Summary.

The Lan Stat. Summary contextual area displays the summary of the main counters of the Ethernet
ports.
1. Select Maintenance > Lan Stat. Summary.
2. Press Reset All and confirm.

All the counters of all the Ethernet ports are set to zero.

Lan Stat. Summary contextual area
The table present in the contextual area, displays the summary of the main counters of the Ethernet ports.
Every table row corresponds to a counter. For every counter is displayed in the column:
Parameter. Counter name:
• Byte Received (Total Byte Received). Total number of octets of data (including those in bad
packets) received on the network. This value includes 4 FCS octects.
• Frame Received (Total Frame Received). Total number of packets (including bad packets,
broadcast packets, and multicast packets) received.
• Byte Sent. Number of transmitted bytes. This counter is increased once for every data octet
of a transmitted good packet.
• Frame Sent. Number of transmitted frames. This counter is increased once for every trans-
mitted good packet.
• Dropped Frame (or Event). Total number of events (frames) in which packets were dropped
by the probe due to lack of resources. This value is not necessarily the absolute number of
discarded packets, as it represents only the number of times that this condition occurred af-
ter the exhaustion of the memory resources; the packets can be discarded also for other
causes.
• CRC Err. (CRC Align Errors). Total number of packets received that had a length of between
64 and n (parameter Max Packet Size, it can be set to 1522 or 2048) octets with bad Frame
Check Sequence (FCS) and an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a
non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
The depth of the events stored by each single counter is equal to 2E32.
The counters are in compliance with the specification RFC 2819. The Byte Received counter, differ-
ently from what specified in RFC 2819, does not include the bytes belonging to packets of sizes
greater than the Max Packet Size.
Lan1, Lan2, PortA. Value of the counters with respect to every single port of the Ethernet Switch.
The value of each counter refer to the moment when the context is opened or updated.
Push-button:
Refresh. Update the counters’ results.
Reset All. Reset the counters’ results.

Advanced Stat. Mon.
The Advanced Stat. Mon. command manages the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports displaying the
main counters of packets/bytes in input/output subdivided by every single port. The trend of the traffic can
be filtered according to specific user-defined criteria.
Verify/manage the main counters of an Ethernet port whose traffic is filtered according to Internal Pri-
ority value
Verify/manage the main counters of an Ethernet port whose traffic is filtered according to C-VID iden-
tifier
Verify/manage the main counters of an Ethernet port whose traffic is filtered according to the S-VID
and C-VID identifiers
The selection of the command displays the Advanced Stat. Mon. contextual area.
Verify/manage the main counters of an Ethernet port whose traffic is filtered accord-
ing to Internal Priority value
1. Select Maintenance > Advanced Stat. Mon.
2. Press the push-button relevant to the port you wish to verify/filter the traffic trend for.
Press to compress the Advanced Stat. Mon. window. Press to expand the window.
More Advanced Stat. Mon. windows can be opened relevant to different Ethernet ports.
3. If not already present, set the value Internal Priority in the Select Group field.
The meaning of Internal Priority refers to its association with the possible manageable priorities
(802.1p, TOS/DSCP...) and the corresponding selected queue.
If the Select Group parameter cannot be changed, this means that the supervision system NMS5UX/
NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX has activated the RMon count at service level.
If one of the external port is selected, the following counters are displayed in the Counters column:
• Dropped Frame. Total number of frames in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack
of resources. This value is not necessarily the absolute number of discarded packets, as it rep-
resents only the number of times that this condition occurred after the exhaustion of the mem-
• Received Frame. Number of received correct frames. This counter is increased once for every
good packet (Unicast + Multicast + Broadcast) received.
• Received Byte. Total number of received bytes relevant to correct packets. This counter is in-
creased once for every data octet of good packets (Unicast + Multicast + Broadcast) received.
• 64 (Rx) Byte. Total number of packets received that were 64 octets in length.
• 65 to 127 (Rx) Byte. Total number of packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in
length inclusive.
• 128 to 255 (Rx) Byte. Total number of packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets
in length inclusive.
• 256 to 511 (Rx) Byte. Total number of packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets
in length inclusive.
• 512 to 1023 (Rx) Byte. Total number of packets received that were between 512 and 1023 oc-
tets in length inclusive.
• 1024 to Max Pkt size (Rx) Byte. Total number of received packets with a length greater than
1024 octets.
If the internal port is selected, the following counters are displayed in the Counters column:
• Frame Sent. Number of transmitted correct frames. This counter is increased once for every
good packet (Unicast + Multicast + Broadcast) transmitted.

• Byte Sent. Total number of transmitted bytes relevant to correct packets. This counter is in-
creased once for every data octet of good packets (Unicast + Multicast + Broadcast) transmit-
ted.
• 64 (Tx) Byte. Total number of transmitted packets that were 64 octets in length.
• 65 to 127 (Tx) Byte. Total number of transmitted packets that were between 65 and 127 octets
in length inclusive
• 128 to 255 (Tx) Byte. Total number of transmitted packets that were between 128 and 255 oc-
tets in length inclusive.
• 256 to 511 (Tx) Byte. Total number of transmitted packets that were between 256 and 511 oc-
tets in length inclusive
• 512 to 1023 (Tx) Byte. Total number of transmitted packets that were between 512 and 1023
octets in length inclusive.
• 1024 to Max Pkt size (Tx) Byte. Total number of transmitted packets with a length greater than
1024 octets.
The depth of the events stored by each single counter is equal to 2E32. The counters are in com-
pliance with the specification RFC 2819. The Received Byte counter, differently from what specified
in RFC 2819, does not include the bytes belonging to packets of sizes greater than the Max Packet
Size.
The Internal Priority columns display the values of the counters relevant only to Ethernet packets with
the specific priority.
The value of the each counter refers to the moment when the relevant port is selected or the context
is updated. To update the data, press Refresh.
The counter:
• Total Dropped Frames indicates the total number of frames in which packets were dropped by
the probe due to lack of resources. This value is not necessarily the absolute number of discard-
ed packets, as it represents only the number of times that this condition occurred after the ex-
haustion of the memory resources; the packets can be discarded also for other causes. Press
Refresh Dropped Frame to update the value.
Parameter available only for the LANs of the Switch.
• Total Transmitted Frames indicates the total number of transmitted frames. Press Refresh
Transmitted Frame to update the value.
Parameter available only for the internal port of the Switch (Radio port).
4. If the Advanced Stat. Mon. <Ethernet port> window contains only the Counters column or the Internal
Priority column is not present, it is necessary to add the column in the following way:
a. Press Add.
b. Set, in the Internal Priority field, the wished value of priority (number between 0 and 7).
If the Add All box becomes active, one column will be inserted for every value of Internal Priority
(Int.Prio. 1... Int.Prio. 7) in the Advanced Stat. Mon. <Ethernet port> window.
c. Press OK and confirm.

The Advanced Stat. Mon. <Ethernet port> window displays, next to the Counters column, the
Internal Priority <value> column.
Repeat the step 4 to create the columns relevant to the wished values of priority 802.1p.
The columns relevant to the priority values will remain set until when the user removes them or the
criterion used to filter the traffic is changed (change of the value for the Select Group parameter).
In the heading of the columns created by operator there is the symbol ( ). Selecting it, the following
commands are displayed:
• Sort Ascending. Sort in ascending order (from lowest to greatest value) the rows of the table
with respect to the value present in the specific column.
Command available when the column contains at least one value different from 0.
• Sort Descending. Sort in descending order (from greatest to lowest value) the rows of the ta-
ble with respect to the value present in the specific column.
• Columns. Active ( ) and deactive ( ) the display of a column in the table.
• Refresh. Update the values of the counters present in the specific column.
• Remove. Remove the specific column.

• Reset. Reset the values of the counters present in the specific column.
In the Advanced Stat. Mon. <Ethernet port> window, the push-button:

• Remove All. Remove all the Internal Priority columns set by the user.
• Refresh. Update the values of the counters present in all the Internal Priority columns.
• Reset. Reset the values of the counters present in all the Internal Priority columns.
ing to C-VID identifier
3. If not already present, set the value C Vid in the Select Group field.
The Counters column displays the following counters:

Counter available only for the LANs of the Switch.
• Received Frame. Total number of received frames.
• Received Byte. Total number of octets of data received on the network. This value includes 4
FCS octets.
• Frame Sent. Number of transmitted frames. This counter is increased once for every transmitted
good packet.
• Byte Sent. Number of transmitted bytes. This counter is increased once for every data octet of
a transmitted good packet
• 64 (Tx + Rx) Byte. Total number of transmitted and received packets that were 64 octets in
length.
• 65 to 127 (Tx + Rx) Byte. Total number of transmitted and received packets that were between
65 and 127 octets in length inclusive
128 and 255 octets in length inclusive.
• 512 to 1023 (Tx + Rx) Byte. Total number of transmitted and received packets that were be-
tween 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive.
• 1024 to Max Pkt size (Tx + Rx) Byte. Total number of transmitted and received packets with a
length greater than 1024 octets.

pliance with the specification RFC 2819. The Received bytes counter, differently from what spec-
ified in RFC 2819, does not include the bytes belonging to packets of sizes greater than the Max
Packet Size.
The <C-VID identifier> columns (for example 6) point out the values of the counters relevant only to
Ethernet packets with the specific C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) identifier.
The counter:

4. If the Advanced Stat. Mon. <Ethernet port> window contains only the Counters column or the <C-VID
identifier> column relevant to the wished C-VID value is not present, it is necessary to add the column
in the following way:
a. Press Add.
b. Set, in the C Vid field, the wished C-VID value (number between 2 and 4094), press OK and
confirm.
The Advanced Stat. Mon. <Ethernet port> window displays the <C-VID identifier> column next
to Counters column.
Repeat the step 4 to create the columns relevant to the wished C-VID values.
The columns relevant to the C-VID values will remain set until when the user removes them or the cri-
terion used to filter the traffic is changed (change of value for the parameter Select Group).

• Remove All. Remove all the <C-VID identifier> columns set by the user.
• Refresh. Update the values of the counters present in all the <C-VID identifier> columns.
• Reset. Reset the values of the counters present in all the <C-VID identifier> columns.
ing to the S-VID and C-VID identifiers
WARNING For the external port of the Ethernet Switch, this operation is available only if the port is in mo-
dality Secure - Provider Mode (parameter 802.1q Setting, value Secure - parameter Provider active).
3. If not already present, set the value C Vid-S Vid in the Select Group field.
The following counters are displayed in the Counters column:

Counter available only for the LANs of the Switch.
• Received Frames. Total number of received frames.
• Received Byte. Total number of octets of data received on the network. This value includes 4
FCS octets.
• Frame Sent. Number of transmitted frames. This counter is increased once for every transmitted
good packet.
• Byte Sent. Number of transmitted bytes. This counter is increased once for every data octet of
a transmitted good packet
• 64 (Tx + Rx) Byte. Total number of transmitted and received packets that were 64 octets in
length.
128 and 255 octets in length inclusive.
• 512 to 1023 (Tx + Rx) Byte. Total number of transmitted and received packets that were be-
tween 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive.
• 1024 to Max Pkt size (Tx + Rx) Byte. Total number of transmitted and received packets with a
length greater than 1024 octets.

pliance with the specification RFC 2819. The Received Byte counter, differently from what spec-
ified in RFC 2819, does not include the bytes belonging to packets of sizes greater than the Max
Packet Size.
The <C-VID S-VID identifiers> columns (e.g. 6-9) point out the values of the counters relevant only to
the Ethernet packets with the specific C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) and S-VID (Service VLAN Iden-
tifier) identifier
The counter:
4. If the Advanced Stat. Mon. <Ethernet port> window contains only the Counters column or the <C-VID
S-VID identifier> column relevant to the wished C-VID and S-VID values is not present, it is necessary
to add the column in the following way:
a. Press Add.
b. Set the wished C-VID value (number between 2 and 4094) in the C Vid field.
c. Set the wished S-VID value (number between 2 and 4094) in the S Vid field.
d. Press OK and confirm.

The Advanced Stat. Mon. <Ethernet port> window displays the <C-VID S-VID identifier> col-
umn next to the Counters column.
Repeat the step 4 to create the columns relevant to the wished C-VID and S-VID values.
The columns relevant to the C-VID/S-VID values will remain set until when the user removes them or
the criterion used to filter the traffic is changed (change of value for the parameter Select Group).


• Remove All. Remove all the <C-VID S-VID identifier> columns set by the user.
• Refresh. Update the values of the counters present in all the <C-VID S-VID identifier> columns.
• Reset. Reset the values of the counters present in all the <C-VID S-VID identifier> columns.

Advanced Stat. Mon. contextual area
This contextual area allows managing the traffic flow on the Ethernet ports, displaying the main counters
of the packets/bytes in input/output subdivided by single port.
Push-button:
Refresh. Not meaningful in this context.
Help. Open the help on line.
Show <Ethernet port>. Open the Advanced Stat. Mon. <Ethernet port> window, where the traffic
flow on the specific port can be verified/filtered.
The traffic flow is filtered depending on specific criteria defined by the user.
The description of the available criteria and, depending on their setting, of the elements present in the
Advanced Stat. Mon. <Ethernet port> window is reported in the following procedures:
Verify/manage the main counters of an Ethernet port whose traffic is filtered according to Internal
Priority value
Verify/manage the main counters of an Ethernet port whose traffic is filtered according to C-VID
identifier
Verify/manage the main counters of an Ethernet port whose traffic is filtered according to the S-VID
and C-VID identifiers

RMon
The RMon command manages the statistic counters of the Ethernet ports of the equipment.
The managed counters are described in RFC 2819 - History Control Group.
Verify the collection status of the statistic counters of the equipment Ethernet ports
Activate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port
Deactivate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port
Display the values of statistical counters of an Ethernet port
The selection of the command displays the RMon contextual area
In order to deepen this topic, see Implementation of the RMon standard in the equipment managed by
WEB LCT
Verify the collection status of the statistic counters of the equipment Ethernet ports
1. Select Maintenance > RMon.

The RMon contextual area displays the status of the Ethernet ports in relation to the count of the sta-
tistics.

2. Execute one of the following actions:
• Select the Ethernet port in Stopped status to be activated and press Show.
• Double click on the Ethernet port in Stopped status to be activated.
3. Press Start and confirm.

If the selected port is inactive (Rate Control - Disable), a warning message is displayed.
The count is started-up.
After the start of the measure, the display of the data relevant to the first sampling range could take
more than one minute.
WARNING The deactivation of the count involves the loss of the collected data.

• Select the Ethernet port in Running status to be deactivated and press Show.
• Double click on the Ethernet port in Running status to be deactivated.
3. Press Stop and confirm.

The count is stopped.
WARNING Operation meaningful only for Ethernet ports for which the count of the RMon statistics is active.

• Select the Ethernet port in Running status and press Show.
• Double click on the Ethernet port in Running status.
The Remote Monitoring window displays the evolution in time (history) of the statistic counters from
the start of the count on the specific port.
More Remote Monitoring windows can be opened relevant to different Ethernet ports.

RMon contextual area
The table, present in the contextual area, displays the status of the Ethernet ports in relation to the count
of the statistics.
Every row of the table corresponds to one port. For every port, is pointed out in the column:
Lan Port. Port of the Ethernet Switch.
Status. Port status in relation to the count of the statistics:

• Stopped. The count is not on progress.
• Running. The count is on progress.
Push-button:
Help. Open the help on line.
Show. Open the Remote Monitoring window.
Related Topics
Implementation of the RMon standard in the equipment managed by WEB LCT
Remote Monitoring window
The window shows the statistics counting of the specific port.
In the window there is a table.

Every row of the table corresponds to a sampling period of 60 seconds (displayed in Time column).
The other columns display the value of the counter in the specific sampling period. For the description of
the counter refer to par. Ethernet counters (RMon).
For the Octets(Rx) counter between brackets, the number of bytes within a second (kB/s) is pointed out.
The statistic counters of the considered Ethernet port are freezed by the equipment each minute.
For each port, the equipment can store a maximum of 240 samples (corresponding to 4 hours). When the
maximum value is reached, the new data will overwrite the oldest ones.
At the end of a sampling interval, for each counter, the pointed out value corresponds to the value regis-
tered during the measuring interval.
If the count is disable the table will be empty.
Selecting the heading of a column, the symbol ( ) is displayed. Selecting it, the following commands are
displayed:
Sort Ascending. Not available in this context.
Sort Descending. Not available in this context.
Columns. Active ( ) and deactive ( ) the display of a column in the table.
Push-button:
Start. Activate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port. Push-button displayed in
alternative to the Stop.
Stop. Deactivate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port. Push-button displayed in
alternative to the Start.
Refresh. Update the data.

Freeze. Interrupt the dynamic display of the values in the window (freezes the window). Push-button
displayed in alternative to the Unfreeze. When the window is opened, the dynamic display of the val-
ues is active by default.
Unfreeze. Re-activates the dynamic display of the values in the window. Push-button displayed in al-
ternative to the Freeze.
The List Update in: x sec parameter indicates the seconds (x value) missing to the end of the current
sampling interval, at the end of which the new row is displayed.
The wording List Update in: sec indicates that the window is freezed (see Freeze/Unfreeze push-button).

Implementation of the RMon standard in the equipment managed by WEB LCT
ALFOplus80 equipment implements the RMon standard with the modalities described here below:
RMon Standard
Outline on the operation of RMon standard
Management from Web LCT of the statistics counters foreseen by RMON standard
Ethernet counters (RMon)
RMon Standard
RMon (Remote Monitoring) is a standard whose function is providing a set of services of statistics count,
monitoring and alarm report with reference to the activity of a LAN network.
These services are defined in terms of MIB (Management Information Base) group described in the docu-
ment RFC2819 - Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base, which must be read for any
further detail.
Outline on the operation of RMon standard
The RMon standard is based on two components: an agent (RMon probe) and a client (remote management
station).
The agent saves the data within its own RMon tables present on the network devices (equipment, routers,
etc.). The RMon probes can see only the traffic flowing through themselves and therefore are located on
each (internal/external) port of the Ethernet Switch of the device to monitor.
The remote management station communicates with the RMon agent to obtain and correlate the RMon da-
ta. Generally, the station is equipped with an interface (graphic or textual) which allows the display and
the analysis of the collected RMon data.
Management from Web LCT of the statistics counters foreseen by RMON standard
With reference to what depicted in the previous paragraph, the RMon functionality allows the analysis of
the data collected by the probes present on each (internal/external) port of the Ethernet Switch of the
equipment in compliance with the RMon standard (RMon MIB group: History).
In order to store in the equipment and display the statistics history of a port, it is necessary to activate the
measure on the port (see Activate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port). The collec-
tion of the statistic counters on this port will remain active until when an user (WEB LCT or SCT/LMT) does
not deactivate it (see Deactivate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port).
Once the measure is activated, the probes collect the statistic data, which are stored in the RMon table of
the equipment. The storing takes place each 60 seconds (sampling range).
The equipment stores these data into a rotation buffer where, when full, the new information overwrites
the old ones (value set to 240 samples which allow storing 4 hours in the equipment).
The data relevant to the statistics are available to the user and displayed, in form of table, subdivided by
single Ethernet port (see Display the values of statistical counters of an Ethernet port).
WEB LCT displays the history of the last two hours with intervals of 1 minute.
During the count, the display of the data in the Remote Monitoring <porta Ethernet> window can be inter-
rupted. This operation does not interrupt the count, but freezes only the data present in the window. In
fact, when the data update is re-activated, the window displays the values of all the sampling ranges (up
to a maximum of 120), even those stored in the equipment while the window was freezed.
Ethernet counters (RMon)

The description of the counters is the same reported for the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output
from an Ethernet port (see Lan Statistics).
The only difference is the name of the counter which, in some cases, change from the RMon counters with
respect to the Lan Statistics counters.
Ethernet counters denomination (RMon) reports the correspondence of the names for the Ethernet RMon
counters.
The counter Utilization is meaningful only as RMon counter and has the following definition: estimate of
the average utilization of the port in the sampling interval expressed as hundredths of percentage.
The percentage of usage of the radio port refers to the bit rate of the port at the Switch (1Gbit/s) and not
to the available radio band.
The percentage of usage of the LAN ports instead refers to the real bit rate of the port (10Mbit/s, 100Mbit/
s or 1Gbit/s).
Tab.7 Ethernet counters denomination (RMon)
Ethernet counters denomination Ethernet counters denomination

RMon - History Lan Statistics
Drop Events Dropped Frame
Octects (Rx) (kB/s) Total Byte Received
Pkts (Rx) Total Frame Received
Broadcasts (Rx) Broadcast Frame Received
Multicasts (Rx) Multicast Frame Received

CRC Align Errors CRC Align Errors
Undersize Pkts Undersize Frame
Oversize Pkts Oversize Frame
Fragments Fragments
Jabbers Jabbers
Collisions Collisions
Utilization (Rx) (%) -
Octects (Tx) (kB/s) Byte Sent
Pkts (Tx) Frame Sent
Broadcasts (Tx) Out Broadcast Frame
Multicasts (Tx) Out Multicast Frame
Utilization (Tx) (%) -

S/N Meas
The S/N Meas command displays the measure of the signal/noise ratio (S/N), which allows evaluating the
quality of the radio communication channel.
Verify the value of the S/N measure
Update the value of the S/N measure
The selection of the command displays the S/N Meas. contextual area
Verify the value of the S/N measure
1. Select Maintenance > S/N Meas.

The S/N Meas. contextual area displays the value of the signal/noise ratio.
Update the value of the S/N measure
1. Select Maintenance > S/N Meas.

The S/N parameter indicates the value of the signal/noise ratio.
2. Press Refresh to update the value.

S/N Meas. contextual area
The contextual area shows the value of the S/N measure.
S/N. Value of the signal/noise ratio.

The measure is always in progress.
Push-button:
Refresh. Update the value of the S/N measure

Radio BER
The Radio BER command allows verifying the quality of the signal received by the equipment.
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of Radio BER measure
Activate the measure (BER and error count)
Deactivate the measure (BER and error count)
The selection of the command displays the Radio BER contextual area.
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of Radio BER measure
1. Select Maintenance > Radio BER.

The Radio BER contextual area displays the status and the configuration parameters of Radio BER
measure.
WARNING The operation is traffic affecting.

2. Select the On option (Test Mode parameter).

A message warns that the activation of the measure will involve the loss of the radio link and, as con-
sequence, the connection with the remote equipment.
4. Press Apply.

The activation of measure activates the MAN. OP. alarm. If the equipment is switched off and then
switched on again, the measure is inactive independently from the previous setting.
6. Press Start Measure and confirm.

To restart the measure (reset of BER and number of errors), press Start Measure and confirming.
2. Select the Off option (Test Mode parameter).

Radio BER contextual area
The contextual area shows the status and the configuration parameters of Radio BER measure.
BER. Bit Error Rate: ratio between the number of received errored bits and the number of total received
bits. BER value is dynamically updated during the measure.
Errors. Number of errors detected from the start of the measure.
Elapsed Time. Time (expressed in seconds) range after the measure active.
Synch Loss events. Number of times that the Sync Loss Alarm activated from the start of the meas-
ure.
Sync Loss Alarm. Status of Synch Loss alarm.

Test Mode. Activation status of the measure:

• On. The Radio BER measure is active.
• Off. The Radio BER measure is deactivated.
Push-button:
Start Measure. Start o restart the measure.
Related Topics

Radio Loop
WARNING Setting a specific management configuration involves a different effect of the loops on how the
supervision is hold for every port of the Ethernet Switch (see Management configurations (more info) and
Tab.8).
The Radio Loop command manages the radio loops.

Verify the radio loops status
Activate a radio loop
Deactivate a radio loop
The selection of the command displays the Radio Loop contextual area
In order to deepen this topic, see Loop (more info)
Verify the radio loops status
1. Select Maintenance > Radio Loop.

The Radio Loop contextual area displays the current status of the radio loops.

The activation of the radio loop can affect the traffic and the supervision (see Tab.8).
2. Select the option relevant to the loop that you want to activate.
It is not possible to set more loops at the same time, the selection of an option automatically disables
the previously selected one.
3. Press Apply.

The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned
on again, the loop results deactivated independently from the previous setting.
2. Select the Loop OFF option.

Radio Loop contextual area
The contextual area shows the current status of the radio loops.
Loop. Status of the loops:

• Loop OFF. No loop active.
• RF Loop. RF loop active: Ethernet traffic is not looped.
• RF Loop (ETH not squelched). RF loop active: Ethernet traffic is not looped.
• Base Band Loop (ETH not squelched). Base band loop active: Ethernet traffic is looped.
Push-button:
Related Topics
Loop (more info)

Loop (more info)
WARNING The activation of the radio loop affects the traffic.

Before activating a loop, it is suggested to verify that the timeout of the manual operations is set. If the
timeout is not active, the loop will be active until its deactivation by the user, the switch-off/switch-on of
the equipment or the equipment reset.
only or for the contemporary transport of the traffic and of the supervision (see Management configurations
(more info).
Setting a specific management configuration involves a different effect of the loops on how the supervision
is hold for every port of the Ethernet Switch, as indicated in Tab.8.
Tab.8 Effect of loops with respect to the management configurations
Legend. OK The transport of supervision through the port is not compromised by the activation of the loop
Lost The transport of supervision through the port is compromised by the activation of the loop NS The
port does not transport supervision NA Not Available (loop not available).
Management Loop Supervision of local equipment through

configuration LAN 1 LAN2 Port A
Lan1 Disabled LAN 1 - Line Loop NS OK NS
Lan2 Local Access Only
LAN 2 - Line Loop NA NA NA
RF Loop NS OK NS
RF Loop (ETH not squelched) NS OK NS
Base Band Loop (ETH not squelched) NS OK NS
Lan1 Disabled LAN 1 - Line Loop NS OK OK
Lan2 Out Of Band
RF Loop NS OK Lost
RF Loop (ETH not squelched) NS OK Lost
Base Band Loop (ETH not squelched) NS OK Lost
Lan1 In Band LAN 1 - Line Loop Lost OK OK
Lan2 Local Access Only LAN 2 - Line Loop NA NA NA
RF Loop OK OK Lost
RF Loop (ETH not squelched) Lost OK Lost
Base Band Loop (ETH not squelched) Lost OK Lost
Lan2 Drop Node
RF Loop OK OK Lost
RF Loop (ETH not squelched) Lost OK Lost
Base Band Loop (ETH not squelched) Lost OK Lost
Lan2 In Band
LAN 2 - Line Loop OK Lost OK
RF Loop OK OK Lost
RF Loop (ETH not squelched) Lost Lost Lost
Base Band Loop (ETH not squelched) Lost Lost Lost
Lan1 In Band LAN 1 - Line Loop Lost NS OK
Lan2 Disabled
LAN 2 - Line Loop OK NS OK
RF Loop OK NS Lost
RF Loop (ETH not squelched) Lost NS Lost
Base Band Loop (ETH not squelched) Lost NS Lost

ALARMS LIST
Tab.9 indicates the list of the alarms relevant to ALFOplus equipment.
The alarms are not listed in alphabetical order but they are grouped according to the corresponding parts
of the equipment. In detail:
Equipment
Common
Eth Lan
P.M. G.828
P.M. Rx Power
P.M. Tx Power
P.M. ACM
Radio
Plug-in
SETS
Unit
For each alarm, the wording present in the Events area (see Equipment status area) of the WEB LCT page
and the wording present in the Alarm Severity Config. contextual area are displayed.
Some alarms have some wordings in italic contained between the symbols < >. They, in the alarm dis-
played in the Events area, represent a variable.
The symbol “-“means that the alarm is not meaningful for the Alarm Severity Config. contextual area.

Tab.9 - Alarms list
Events alarms Alarm Severity Config.
Equipment
Equip. Alarm Synthesis Critical -
Equip. Alarm Synthesis Major -
Equip. Alarm Synthesis Minor -
Equip. Alarm Synthesis Warning -
Common
Equip Manual Operation equipManualOperation
RMON Alarm <alarm description> equipRmonAlarm
Ethernet Compression/Fragmentation Configuration Mismatch radioEquipCompressFragmentConfigMismatch-
Alarm
G.8032 Ring: <Ring name> Port: <Lan-1, Lan-2, Port A> Alarm Status G8032PortOperatingStatusAlarm
OAM-FM MA:<MA name> MEP Id:<MEP identifier> Fail Alarm OamFmMepFailAlarm
OAM-FM MA:<MA name> MEP Id:<MEP identifier> Config. Mismatch Alarm OamFmMepConfigurationMismatchAlarm
WAKE UP Manager IP address: <IP address> -
Eth Lan
BASE BAND Link Loss Forwarding Alarm ethLanPhyLinkLossForwarding
BASE BAND Loss of Signal Alarm ethLanPhyLinkLoss
BASE BAND Master-Slave Configuration fault Alarm ethLanPhyMasterSlaveConfigurationFault
BASE BAND Physical Coding Sublayer Sync Alarm ethLanPhySync
BASE BAND Unresolved Autonegotiation Alarm ethLanPhyAutoNegotiation
BASE BAND Link Aggregation LACP protocol down ethLanPhyLagLacpProtocolDown
P.M. G.828
P.M. RADIO G.828 15Mcounter ES threshold cross Alarm pmG828-15MEsAlarm
P.M. RADIO G.828 15Mcounter SEP threshold cross Alarm pmG828-15MSepAlarm
P.M. RADIO G.828 15Mcounter SES threshold cross Alarm pmG828-15MSesAlarm
P.M. RADIO G.828 24Hcounter ES threshold cross Alarm pmG828-24HEsAlarm
P.M. RADIO G.828 24Hcounter SEP threshold cross Alarm pmG828-24HSepAlarm
P.M. RADIO G.828 24Hcounter SES threshold cross Alarm pmG828-24HSesAlarm
P.M. RADIO G.828 UAS Alarm pmG828-UASAlarm
P.M. Rx Power
P.M. RADIO RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts1 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-15MRlts1Alarm
P.M. RADIO RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts1 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-24HRlts1Alarm
P.M. Tx Power
P.M. RADIO TxPower 15Mcounter Tlts1 threshold cross Alarm pmTxPwr-15MTlts1Alarm

P.M. RADIO TxPower 24Hcounter Tlts1 threshold cross Alarm pmTxPwr-24HTlts1Alarm
P.M. ACM
P.M. RADIO ACM 15M counter 4QAM Strong threshold cross Alarm pmACM-15M-4QAMStrAlarm
P.M. RADIO ACM 15M counter 4QAM threshold cross Alarm pmACM-15M-4QAMAlarm
P.M. RADIO ACM 15M counter 16QAM Strong threshold cross Alarm pmACM-15M-16QAMStrAlarm
P.M. RADIO ACM 24H counter 4QAM Strong threshold cross Alarm pmACM-24H-4QAMStrAlarm
P.M. RADIO ACM 24H counter 4QAM threshold cross Alarm pmACM-24H-4QAMAlarm
P.M. RADIO ACM 24H counter 16QAM Strong threshold cross Alarm pmACM-24H-16QAMStrAlarm
Radio
Ber Sync Loss Alarm radioEquipBerSyncLossAlarm
Adaptive Modulation Reduced Capacity Notification radioEquipReducedCapacityAlarm
Link Id. Alarm radioEquipLinkIdAlarm
Link Telemetry Fail Alarm radioEquipLinkTelemetryFailAlarm
RADIO Invalid Frequency Alarm radioInvalidFrequencyAlarmSet
RADIO Rx Alarm radioRxAlarmSet
RADIO Rx Power Low Alarm radioRxPowerLowAlarm
RADIO Tx Power Alarm radioTxPowerAlarm
RADIO Vco Fail Alarm radioRtVcoFail
RADIO Rx Quality Low Alarm radioRxQualityLowAlarm
RADIO Rx Quality Low Warning radioRxQualityLowWarning
RADIO Prx change radioPrxChange
RADIO Ptx change radioPtxChange
RADIO Modulator Fail Alarm radioModulatorFailAlarm
RADIO Demodulator Fail Alarm radioDemodulatorFailAlarm
RADIO Radio Rx AGC Alarm radioRxAGCAlarm
RADIO Configuration Mismatch Alarm radioConfigMismatchSet

Plug-in
[<module name>] Plug-in module Status plug-inStatusChange
[<module name>] Plug-in module Mismatch Alarm plug-inModuleMismatchAlarm
[<module name>] Plug-in module Fail Alarm plug-inModuleAlarm
[<module name>] Plug-in module Loss of Signal Alarm plug-inLosAlarm
SETS
BASE BAND Sets <name of the synchronism signal> Active Status timingSynkActiveStatus
BASE BAND Sets <name of the synchronism signal> Drift Alarm timingSynkDriftAlarm
BASE BAND Sets <name of the synchronism signal> LTI Alarm timingSynkLossAlarm
BASE BAND Sets Free Running Status timingGeneratorFreeRunningStatus
BASE BAND Sets Holdover Status timingGeneratorHoldoverStatus
BASE BAND Sets T0 Fail Alarm timingGeneratorT0FailAlarm
Unit
<unit name> Unit Fail Alarm unitFailAlarm
<unit name> Unit Hw Mismatch Alarm unitHwMismatchAlarm
<unit name> Unit Missing Alarm unitMissingAlarm
<unit name> Unit Not Responding Alarm unitNotRespondingAlarm
<unit name> Unit Sw Mismatch Alarm unitSwMismatchAlarm
(1) See Performance Monitoring

OPERATIONS LIST
A
Adaptive modulation configuration parameters, verify .................................................................102
Alarms
Change the severity level of an alarm ................................................................................... 92
Enable/disable an alarm ...................................................................................................... 91
Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm .............................................................. 91
Verify the severity level and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms .................................. 91
Alarms stored into the equipment controller
Delete ............................................................................................................................... 73
Save to file ........................................................................................................................ 72
ATPC
Intervention threshold, verify/modify ...................................................................................191
Maximum output power value at the transmitter, verify/modify ...............................................191
Operating status, verify/modify ...........................................................................................190
Regulation range, verify/modify ...........................................................................................191
Table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/reception for every ACM profile,
display .............................................................................................................................192
C
Communication stack
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 82
D
Duplexer frequency, verify/modify ............................................................................................188
E
Enabling of the alarms
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 91
Equipment addresses (Ethernet port, LCT port, MAC address, IP Over OSI port, NSAP), verify ........... 34
Equipment configuration
Save to file ........................................................................................................................ 72
Equipment firmware
Switch the memory benches ................................................................................................ 81
Update .............................................................................................................................. 80
Verify the version ............................................................................................................... 80
Equipment identifier, modify ..................................................................................................... 33
Equipment properties (type, ID, SNMP IP address, firmware version, etc.), verify ............................ 33
Equipment reference date/time, align to the PC date/time ............................................................ 34
Equipment software reset .............................................................................................. 35, 40, 83
Equipment units (type, code, version and functional status), verify ................................................ 35
Ethernet Switch (Enh.)
Address learning modality in MAC Table, verify/modify ...........................................................125
Aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table ..............................................................125
Compression of headers of Ethernet packets in input from LAN ports, verify/modify ...................147
Correspondence between MPLS priority and 802.1p priority of the packets in input from LAN ports and
in output from Radio port, verify/modify ...............................................................................142
Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field, verify/modify ............................................................124
Hysteresis of the LLF modality, verify/modify ........................................................................125
Maximum size of the accepted packet, verify/modify ..............................................................124
Output queue of LAN ports which a packet is assigned to depending on its 802.1p priority Tag, verify/

modify .............................................................................................................................137
Output queue of LAN ports which a packet is assigned to depending on its PTOS/DSCP field, verify/
modify .............................................................................................................................137
Output queue of Radio port which a packets is assigned to depending on its native 802.1p priority Tag,
verify/modify ....................................................................................................................141
Output queue of radio ports which a packet is assigned to depending on its PTOS/DSCP field, verify/
modify .............................................................................................................................142
Output queue of Radio ports which a packets is assigned to depending on its native MPLS priority
Tag .................................................................................................................................141
Reset the MAC Table ..........................................................................................................125
Status of fragmentation of Ethernet packets, verify/modify .....................................................127
VLan
Create a virtual Lan ......................................................................................................126
Delete a virtual Lan ......................................................................................................127
Modify a virtual Lan ......................................................................................................127
Verify the existing virtual LANs .......................................................................................126
F
Forwarding of the trap
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 91
Frequency in reception, verify/modify .......................................................................................189
Functionalities enabled for the equipment, enable new functionalities ............................................. 34
Functionalities enabled for the equipment, verify ......................................................................... 34
G
Generation of antenna aiming signal, verify/modify .....................................................................107
I
IP address of remote users, set ................................................................................................. 98
IP address of the agent SNMP, modify ........................................................................................ 33
L
LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.)
Activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line synchronism for the LAN, verify/
modify .............................................................................................................................153
Automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the LAN, verify/modify .......................152
Current management modality of protocol 802.1Q, verify/modify .............................................156
C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN and forwarded to the Radio, with a different VID,
verify/overwrite ................................................................................................................160
Default VID value of the LAN, verify/modify ..........................................................................159
Emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue of the LANs, verify/modify ..........158
Enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality
and the transmission speed used by the LAN, verify/modify ....................................................151
Enabling status of the flow control of the LAN, verify/modify ...................................................152
Enabling status of the LAN, verify/modify .............................................................................151
Enabling status of the LLF modality of the LAN, verify/modify ..................................................162
Inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the LAN, verify/modify .............................................151
List of VID registered in VLAN Table Unit and associated to the LAN, verify ...............................161
Loop on line side of the LAN, activate/deactivate ...................................................................163
Management of Provider Tag in the packets in input to the LAN, verify/modify ...........................160
Management of the 802.1Q field on the messages in input from the LAN, verify/modify ..............159
Management of the LAN in Provider mode, verify/modify ........................................................162
Modality and the criteria used to limit the traffic in input from the LAN, verify/modify .................153
Operating modality of the line synchronism (role) for the LAN, verify/modify .............................153
Ports through which the messages in input from the LAN can transit, verify/modify ....................162

Priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the LAN, verify/remap ................................................157
Priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LAN to the output queue of the Radio
port, verify/modify ............................................................................................................156
Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the LAN ................................................................153
Service Tag List table, verify/modify ....................................................................................157
Traffic transport modality (point-point or Bridge), verify/modify ...............................................160
Value for Port Default and 802.1p priority, verify/modify .........................................................157
LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.) (optical int.)
Enable manually the laser transmission ................................................................................164
Enabling status of the laser, modify .....................................................................................163
Execute the test laser operating status .................................................................................165
Status and configuration of the laser, verify ..........................................................................163
Transmission mode of the laser, modify ................................................................................164
Lan Statistics
Reset the counters’ results ......................................................................................... 196, 199
Verify the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output from the Ethernet ports subdivided by each
port .................................................................................................................................196
Verify the summary of the main counters of the Ethernet ports ................................................199
Verify/manage the main counters of an Ethernet port whose traffic is filtered according to C-VID iden-
tifier ................................................................................................................................203
Verify/manage the main counters of an Ethernet port whose traffic is filtered according to Internal Pri-
ority value ........................................................................................................................201
Verify/manage the main counters of an Ethernet port whose traffic is filtered according to S-VID and
C-VID identifiers ................................................................................................................204
Link identification number, verify/modify ...................................................................................103
Lower threshold of modulation, verify/ modify ............................................................................103
M
MAN. OP
Verify the active manual operations ...................................................................................... 29
Verify/modify the manual operation timeout ........................................................................... 29
Management of synchronisation, verify/modify ...........................................................................109
Modulation status of the RF carrier, verify/modify .......................................................................189
N
Network password and timeout, modify ...................................................................................... 97
O
Open the WEB LCT page of an equipment (Remote Link) .............................................................. 22
Operating status of adaptive modulation
Modify .............................................................................................................................102
Operating status of the adaptive modulation
Verify ..............................................................................................................................102
Operation of the transmitter, verify/modify ................................................................................189
Operations stored into the equipment controller
Delete ............................................................................................................................... 73
Save to file ........................................................................................................................ 72
P
Password and timeout of NMS5UX user, change .......................................................................... 97
Password and timeout of System user, modify ............................................................................ 96
PM
ACM Radio
Display the results and the threshold exceeding alarms ...................................................... 55

Modify the modality used to increase the counters ............................................................. 60
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms .............................................................................. 57
Reset the values of the records (daily and primary) ............................................................ 56
Set the thresholds of the alarms ...................................................................................... 57
Activate a measure ............................................................................................................. 51
Activate all measures in a group contemporaneously ............................................................... 51
Deactivate a measure ......................................................................................................... 51
Deactivate all measure in a group contemporaneously ............................................................. 51
G828 Radio
Set the thresholds of the control parameters and of the alarms ............................................ 53
RxPwr Radio
TxPwr Radio
Verify the status of the measures ......................................................................................... 50
Port A (Enh.)
Automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the internal port, verify/modify ...........177
Configuration of the output queues of the internal port, verify/modify ......................................179
Control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the internal port, verify/modify .................181
C-VID value of the packets in input from the internal port and forwarded to a LAN port with a different
C-VID, verify/modify ..........................................................................................................182
Default VID value of the internal port, verify/modify ..............................................................182
Enabling status of the flow control of the internal port, verify/modify ........................................178
Enabling status of the internal port, verify/modify ..................................................................176
Enabling status of the S_Gentle functionality of the internal port, verify/modify .........................178
Integration constant on the drop possibility in a RED context (internal port), verify/modify ..........179
Mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the internal port, verify/modify ..............178
Ports through which the messages in input from the internal port, verify/modify ........................183
Priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the internal port to the output queue of
the LAN ports, verify/modify ...............................................................................................177
Value for Port Default, verify/modify ....................................................................................177
Port Configuration
Network address and supervision parameters of the equipment, verify/modify ............................ 39
Power profile of RF transmitter, verify/modify ............................................................................103
R
Radio BER
Activate the measure .........................................................................................................216
Deactivate the measure .....................................................................................................216
Verify the configuration parameters of the measure ...............................................................216
Verify the status of the measure ..........................................................................................216
Radio branch label, verify/modify .............................................................................................107
Radio loop
Activate ...........................................................................................................................218
Deactivate ........................................................................................................................218
Verify the status ................................................................................................................218
Reference band/modulation
Modify .............................................................................................................................102
Verify ..............................................................................................................................102
Remote equipment list
Add a station ..................................................................................................................... 24
Add an equipment .............................................................................................................. 25
Open the WEB page of an equipment (Remote Link) ............................................................... 26
Remove a station ............................................................................................................... 24
Remove an equipment ........................................................................................................ 25

Rename a station ............................................................................................................... 24
Reset ................................................................................................................................ 26
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 23
Resolution of the received power (Prx), verify/modify ..................................................................190
Resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx), verify/modify .............................................................190
Restore Factory Default of the equipment ................................................................................... 82
Restore the access to equipment CPU ........................................................................................ 40
Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last operation of con-
figuration restore (configuration revert) ..................................................................................... 88
RMon
Activate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port ..........................................208
Collection status of the statistic counters of the equipment Ethernet ports, verify .......................208
Deactivate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port ......................................208
Display the values of statistical counters of an Ethernet port ...................................................209
Running Default Gateway
Delete ............................................................................................................................... 44
Set/modify ........................................................................................................................ 44
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 43
Running Routing Table
Add an element .................................................................................................................. 43
Remove one or more elements ............................................................................................. 43
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 43
S
S/N measure
Update the value ...............................................................................................................214
Verify the value .................................................................................................................214
Save the whole equipment configuration (configuration backup) .................................................... 87
SNTP functionality
Activate ............................................................................................................................ 75
Deactivate ......................................................................................................................... 76
Set the execution parameters .............................................................................................. 75
Verify the status ................................................................................................................. 75
Stored Default Gateway
Delete ............................................................................................................................... 48
Set/modify ........................................................................................................................ 48
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 47
Add an element .................................................................................................................. 47
Remove one or more elements ............................................................................................. 48
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 47
Synchronisation
Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source ....................................................................111
Enable/disable the use of the source quality as criterion for the synchronism selection ................111
Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source ......................................112
Force the status of T0 synchronisation ..................................................................................110
Force the use of a synchronism source .................................................................................112
Modality to assign the role of the LAN ports (1000Base-T) used as synchronism sources,
verify/modify ....................................................................................................................113
Modify the use priority of a synchronism source .....................................................................111
Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without waiting for the expiry
of Wait Time .....................................................................................................................113
Set a synchronism source as preferential ..............................................................................112
Set the Hold Off Time parameter .........................................................................................110
Set the threshold levels of LTI alarm ....................................................................................110
Set the WTR Time parameter ..............................................................................................110
Verify the status and configuration of the T0 synchronism .......................................................109
Verify/modify the management of SSM protocol for every single LAN ........................................114

T
Threshold level of the signal at reception, verify/modify ..............................................................107
Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (configuration restore) ................................ 87
Transmission frequency, verify/modify ......................................................................................188
Transmission power, set to the minimum value ..........................................................................191
U
Upper threshold of modulation, verify/modify .............................................................................103
User list
Add a user ......................................................................................................................... 95
Delete a user ..................................................................................................................... 96
Modify a user ..................................................................................................................... 96
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 95
Users list
Force the logout of a user .................................................................................................... 21
Verify the users connected to the equipment .......................................................................... 21
W
Wake Up functionality
Activate ............................................................................................................................ 76
Deactivate ......................................................................................................................... 76
Set the execution parameters .............................................................................................. 76
Verify the status ................................................................................................................. 76
WEB LCT
Update .............................................................................................................................. 82
Verify the version ............................................................................................................... 81
WEB LCT page
Close the WEB LCT page ...................................................................................................... 16
Open more WEB LCT pages .................................................................................................. 16
Open the WEB LCT page from Browser (Ethernet connection) ................................................... 15
Open the WEB LCT page from SCT/LMT ................................................................................. 15

PARAMETERS LIST
A Current Stack ...................................... 85
ACM Engine .............................................104

ACM Radio (PM) ........................................ 55 D
ACM Table ...............................................104
Active Modulation ................................104 Default Gateway ....................................... 46
Ethernet Capacity ................................104 Dplx Freq ................................................193
Advanced Stat. Mon.
1024 to Max Pkt size (Rx) Byte .............201
1024 to Max Pkt size (Tx + Rx)
Byte .......................................... 203, 205
E
1024 to Max Pkt size (Tx) Byte ..............202
128 to 255 (Rx) Byte ...........................201 Equipment Date/Time ................................ 36
128 to 255 (Tx + Rx) Byte ............ 203, 205 Equipment Features
128 to 255 (Tx) Byte ...........................202 1588 support ....................................... 37
256 to 511 (Rx) Byte ...........................201 Enhanced eth monitoring ....................... 37
256 to 511 (Tx + Rx) Byte ............ 203, 205 ETH OAM ............................................. 37
256 to 511 (Tx) Byte ...........................202 ETH transport ...................................... 37
512 to 1023 (Rx) Byte .........................201 G8032 (eth ring protection) ................... 37
512 to 1023 (Tx + Rx) Byte .......... 203, 205 OSPF functionality ................................ 37
512 to 1023 (Tx) Byte ..........................202 packet processor (1) ............................. 37
64 (Rx) Byte .......................................201 packet processor (2) ............................. 37
64 (Tx + Rx) Byte ....................... 203, 205 Radio payload encryptions ..................... 37
64 (Tx) Byte .......................................202 Security package (+SSH + SFTP) ........... 37
65 to 127 (Rx) Byte .............................201 SSM G8264 (quality sync) ..................... 37
65 to 127 (Tx + Rx) Byte ............. 203, 205 SyncE & G8264 (quality sync) ................ 37
65 to 127 (Tx) Byte .............................202 Upgrade up to 1024QAM ....................... 37
Byte Sent ................................... 203, 205 Upgrade up to 112M (80 FCC) ................ 37
Dropped Frame .................... 201, 203, 205 Upgrade up to 128QAM ......................... 37
Frame Sent ......................... 201, 203, 205 Upgrade up to 14M (20 FCC) .................. 37
Received Byte ...................... 201, 203, 205 Upgrade up to 16QAM ........................... 37
Received Frame .......................... 201, 203 Upgrade up to 256QAM ......................... 37
Received Frames .................................205 Upgrade up to 28M (30 FCC) .................. 37
Transmitted bytes ...............................202 Upgrade up to 32QAM ........................... 37
Agent IP Address .................................. 19, 36 Upgrade up to 40M ............................... 37
Upgrade up to 4QAM ............................. 37
Alarm ...................................................... 29
Upgrade up to 512QAM ......................... 37
Alarms Upgrade up to 56M (50 FCC) .................. 37
Group/Alarm ........................................ 93 Upgrade up to 64QAM ........................... 37
Severity .............................................. 93 Upgrade up to 7M (10 FCC) ................... 37
Trap Notification ................................... 93
Equipment firmware
ATPC Actual Release ..................................... 84
ATPC Regulation ..................................194 Bench Status ....................................... 84
Current ATPC Power .............................194 Downloading Status .............................. 84
Max Ptx ..............................................194 Release Bench 1 ................................... 84
Reference Modulation Tx Power Control ..194 Release Bench 2 ................................... 84
Upper Modulation ATPC Thresholds on Local Software ............................................. 84
PRx ...................................................194 Software Version .................................. 84
Unit .................................................... 84
Equipment ID ...................................... 19, 36
B Equipment Type ................................... 19, 36
Equipment unit
Bandwidth & Modulation ............................104 Expected Type ..................................... 37
HW Ver. .............................................. 37
Par Part Num ....................................... 38
Part Number ........................................ 38
C Real Type ............................................ 37
Serial Number ...................................... 38
Carrier Only .............................................193 Unit Alarms ......................................... 38
Communication stack Ethernet IP Address ................................... 36

Ethernet IP NetMask .................................. 36 G
Ethernet MAC Address ............................... 36
Ethernet Switch (Enh.) G828 Radio (PM) ....................................... 52
Compression
Bytes Context+Dynamic ..................148
Bytes Header .................................148
C_TAG (802.1Q) .............................148 H
Control Word (RFC4385) .................148
EoMPLS (Ethernet over MPLS) ..........148 Help Web Server ....................................... 13
Ethernet ........................................148
IP+ ...............................................148
Max Number of Labels .....................148
Max Number of S-TAG .....................148 I
MPLS ............................................148
Number of Labels and Tags ..............148 IP ............................................................ 85
Q-in-Q (802.1ad) ...........................148 IP/OSI Stack ............................................. 36
UDP ..............................................148
LLF Hysteresis .....................................130
MAC Addr. Aging Time .........................129
MAC Learning Vid basis ........................129 L
Max Packet size ...................................129
Priority Lan To Radio LAN 1,2 (Enh.)
802.1p Priority ...............................144 802.1Q
MPLS Priority .................................144 802.1q Settings ..............................171
PTOS/DSCP Default Vid ....................................171
Delay .......................................145 Lan to Radio C_Vid Rewrite ..............172
DSCP .......................................145 Lan to Radio C_Vid Rewrite & Selective
Filter ........................................146 QinQ .............................................172
Internal Priority (Queue) .............145 Provider ........................................171
List Filter ..................................145 Selective Provider Tag .....................171
Precedence ...............................145 Traffic Treatment ............................171
Reliab. .....................................145 Alarms ...............................................167
Throug. ....................................145 Cable Crossover ..................................166
Value .......................................145 Duplex ...............................................167
Priority Radio To Lan Egress Priority Policy ............................173
802.1p Priority ...............................139 Flow Control Full Dplx/Back Pressure
PTOS/DSCP Half Dplx ............................................166
Delay .......................................139 Input Filtering Policing
DSCP .......................................139 Mode ............................................168
Filter ........................................140 Line Loop ...........................................174
Internal Priority (Queue) .............139 LLF ....................................................173
List Filter ..................................140 M/S Autoneg .......................................166
Precedence ...............................139 Mac Learning ......................................167
Reliab. .....................................139 Master/Slave ......................................166
Throug. ....................................139 Port Based VLAN .................................173
Value .......................................139 Port Role ............................................167
QinQ ETH type 0x ................................129 Priority
Status ................................................130 Current 802.1Q Settings ..................169
VLan Default Internal Priority ...................170
Default VLan ID ..............................130 Priority Selection ............................169
Disable ..........................................129 Service Tag List ..............................170
Label ............................................129 Rate Control .......................................166
Lan1 .............................................129 Speed ................................................167
Lan2 .............................................130 Speed/Duplex .....................................167
Port A ...........................................130
LAN 1,2 (Enh.) (optical)
Tagged .........................................130
Laser Control
Unmodif. .......................................130
Auto Restart Time ...........................175
Untag. ..........................................130
Mode ............................................174
VLanID .........................................129
Module Type ..................................174
Test Time ......................................175
Transmitter Control .........................174
F Lan Stat.Summary
Byte Received .....................................200
Firmware Version ...................................... 36 Byte Sent ...........................................200
FTP, protocol ............................................ 13 CRC Err ..............................................200
Dropped Frame (or Event) ....................200
Frame Received ...................................200

Frame Sent ........................................200 Actual WFQ ....................................186
Lan Statistics Drop Type .....................................186
Broadcast Frames Received ..................197 Exp. Weighting Constant .................185
Bytes Sent .........................................198 Flow Control ..................................185
Collisions ............................................197 Green Tokens .................................186
CRC Align Errors ..................................197 P max (G) .....................................186
Dropped Frame (or Event) ....................197 P max (Y) ......................................186
Fragments ..........................................197 Queue ...........................................185
Frames 1024 to max pck size ................198 Queue Length (Kbit) .......................185
Frames 128 to 255 Oct .........................197 S gentle (G) ...................................186
Frames 256 to 511 Oct. ........................198 S gentle (Y) ...................................186
Frames 512 to 1023 Oct .......................198 S max (G) .....................................186
Frames 64 Oct. ...................................197 S max (Y) ......................................186
Frames 65 to 127 Oct. .........................197 S min (G) ......................................186
Frames Sent .......................................198 S min (Y) ......................................186
In Pause Frames .................................198 S-gentle ........................................185
Jabbers ..............................................197 Type .............................................185
Late Collisions .....................................198 View RED Curve .............................186
Multicast Frames Received ....................197 WFQ Weight ...................................186
Out Broadcast Frames ..........................198 Yellow Tokens ................................186
Out Multicast Frames ...........................198 Port Configuration
Out Pause Frames ...............................198 Ethernet
Out Unicast Frames .............................198 IP Address ...................................... 41
Oversize Frames .................................197 Net Mask ........................................ 41
Total Byte Received .............................197 In Band VLan Id ................................... 41
Total Frames Received .........................197 LAN 1 ................................................. 41
Undersize Frame .................................197 LAN 2 ................................................. 41
Valid Bytes Received ............................198
Valid Frames Received .........................198
Local Link ID ...........................................105 R
Lower Modulation .....................................104
Radio BER
BER ...................................................217
M Elapsed Time ......................................217
Errors ................................................217
Fail Alarms .........................................217
Measurements Resolution
Sync Loss Alarm ..................................217
Prx ....................................................193 Test Mode ..........................................217
Ptx ....................................................193
Radio Branch Label ...................................108
Remote Element Table ............................... 26
O Remote equipment list ............................... 26

Rescue connection ..................................... 86
OSI ......................................................... 85 RMon
Lan Port .............................................210
Status ................................................210
Routing Table ........................................... 46
P
Routing Table (Running) ............................. 46
PM Routing Table (Stored) ............................... 46
ACM Radio ........................................... 55 RSSI .......................................................108
G828 Radio ......................................... 52 Running Default Gateway ........................... 45
RxPwr Radio ........................................ 61
Default Gateway ................................... 45
TxPwr Radio ........................................ 64
Running Routing Table ............................... 45
Port A (Enh.) Destination .......................................... 45
802.1Q
Hop .................................................... 45
C Vid/S Vid Rewrite .........................187
Interface ............................................. 45
Default Vid ....................................187 Net Mask ............................................. 45
Ingress Filtering Check ....................187
Protocol .............................................. 45
Mac Learning ......................................184
Port ...................................................184 Rx Freq ...................................................193
Port Based VLan ..................................187 Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold .................108
Priority RxPwr Radio (PM) ...................................... 61
Default Priority ...............................185
Priority Selection ............................184
Queue Management Lan To Radio

S Read Only ...................................... 99
Station Op. ..................................... 99
Timeout .............................................. 99
S/N ........................................................215
User Keep Alive .................................... 99
SCT/LMT .................................................. 13 User Name .......................................... 99
SNTP
Main Server IP Address ......................... 77
NTP Server Lost Alarm .......................... 77
Polling Interval (Sec.) ........................... 77
W
Polling Retries ...................................... 77
Polling Timeout (Sec.) ........................... 77 Wake Up
Reserve Server IP Addr ......................... 77 Gosip Address ...................................... 78
NE Location ......................................... 78
Status signal ............................................ 29
NMS IP Address .................................... 78
Stored Default Gateway ............................. 49 Status ................................................. 77
Default Gateway ................................... 49 Timeout (Minutes) ................................ 78
Stored Routing Table ................................. 49 WEB LCT
Destination .......................................... 49 Code ................................................... 85
Hop .................................................... 49 Current version .................................... 85
Interface ............................................. 49 Description .......................................... 85
Net Mask ............................................. 49
WEB Lct Console ....................................... 13
Synchronisation
WEB LCT Product Code ............................... 36
Alarms ...............................................115
Current (Quality area) ..........................115 WEB LCT Version ....................................... 36
Enabled (Quality area) .........................116 WEB LCT, release ........................................ 9
Forced Switch .....................................116
Hold Off Time .....................................115
Internal ..............................................116
LTI Reset Time ....................................115
LTI Set Time .......................................115
Name ................................................116
Ovw Rx Qlty .......................................117
Ovw Tx Qlty ........................................117
Preferential Switch ..............................116
Priority ...............................................116
Rx Quality ..........................................117
Status Control .....................................115
Sync Loss ...........................................117
Synchronisation ..................................115
T2 Radio ............................................116
TE LAN-1 ............................................116
TE LAN-2 ............................................116
Tx Quality ..........................................117
WTR Time ..........................................115
T
Tx Freq ...................................................193
Tx Power Ramp Up To... ............................104
Tx Power Reduction ..................................194
Tx Transmitter .........................................193
TXPwr Radio (PM) ...................................... 64
U
Upper Modulation .....................................104
User
NMS5UX .............................................100
System ..............................................100
User list ..................................................100
Profile ................................................. 99
Read & Write .................................. 99

ASSISTANCE SERVICE
For more information, refer to the section relevant to the technical support on the Internet site of the com-
pany manufacturing the product.


Mn00281e PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Mn00281e PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

WEB LCT

Software application for the management

MANUAL CONTENT ................................................................................................................... 9

WEB LCT APPLICATION.......................................................................................................... 10

WEB LOCAL CRAFT TERMINAL (WEB LCT) PAGE..................................................................... 14

WEB LCT ALFOplus - Release 1.2 - MN.00281.E - 004 1

MENU AND COMMANDS (EQUIPMENT MENU) ......................................................................... 31

2 WEB LCT ALFOplus - Release 1.2 - MN.00281.E - 004

WEB LCT ALFOplus - Release 1.2 - MN.00281.E - 004 3

4 WEB LCT ALFOplus - Release 1.2 - MN.00281.E - 004

WEB LCT ALFOplus - Release 1.2 - MN.00281.E - 004 5

6 WEB LCT ALFOplus - Release 1.2 - MN.00281.E - 004

WEB LCT ALFOplus - Release 1.2 - MN.00281.E - 004 7

ALARMS LIST ....................................................................................................................... 221

OPERATIONS LIST ............................................................................................................... 225

PARAMETERS LIST ............................................................................................................... 231

ASSISTANCE SERVICE.......................................................................................................... 235

8 WEB LCT ALFOplus - Release 1.2 - MN.00281.E - 004

In this manual, to make the writing easier, the wording:

WEB LCT ALFOplus - Release 1.2 - MN.00281.E - 004 9

10 WEB LCT ALFOplus - Release 1.2 - MN.00281.E - 004

Through the WEB LCT application, it is possible to manage:

WEB LCT ALFOplus - Release 1.2 - MN.00281.E - 004 11

Maximum number of... Limit

Equipment in remote equipment list 100

Stations in remote equipment list 30

Equipment which can be connected contemporarily via a single WEB 1

Users (WEB LCT, SCT/LMT and NMS5UX) contemporarily connected to 2

Signals in the Events area 400

12 WEB LCT ALFOplus - Release 1.2 - MN.00281.E - 004

WEB LCT ALFOplus - Release 1.2 - MN.00281.E - 004 13

Open/close the WEB LCT page

14 WEB LCT ALFOplus - Release 1.2 - MN.00281.E - 004

Open the WEB LCT page from Browser (Ethernet connection)

Open the WEB LCT page from Browser (Ethernet connection)

1. Run WEB Lct Console program (see relevant documentation).

3. Type in the address box:

4. Type the name of the SCT/LMT user, in the Username box.

5. Type the access, in the Password box,

Open the WEB LCT page from SCT/LMT

WARNING The following procedure requires that:

WEB LCT ALFOplus - Release 1.2 - MN.00281.E - 004 15

3. Execute one of the following operations:

Open more WEB LCT pages

Close the WEB LCT page

Select the [Logout] parameter.

16 WEB LCT ALFOplus - Release 1.2 - MN.00281.E - 004

1 - Equipment Menu area

Fig.3 shows an example of WEB LCT page of ALFOplus equipment.

Fig.3 Elements of the WEB LCT page (ALFOplus)

WEB LCT ALFOplus - Release 1.2 - MN.00281.E - 004 17

The commands are subdivided in groups:

To display the area again, press the relevant button .

18 WEB LCT ALFOplus - Release 1.2 - MN.00281.E - 004

The Equipment info area indicates the equipment general properties:

Equipment Type. Equipment type.

Equipment ID. Equipment identifier.

Agent IP Address. IP Address assigned to the SNMP agent of the equipment.

RF frequency. The wording ODU Hardware Failure indicates a hardware problem.

ACM Profile. Current ACM profile.

ETH Capacity. Radio capacity reserved to Ethernet tributaries.

The information in the Equipment Info area can be updated pressing .

WEB LCT ALFOplus - Release 1.2 - MN.00281.E - 004 19